Huawei OptiX RTN 950 Commissioning and Configuration Guide(V100R003)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System V100R003C01

Commissioning and Configuration Guide (U2000) Issue

02

Date

2011-05-20

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address:

Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China

Website:

http://www.huawei.com

Email:

[email protected]

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide (U2000)

About This Document

About This Document Related Versions The following table lists the product versions related to this document. Product Name

Version

OptiX RTN 950

V100R003C01

iManager U2000

V100R005C00

Intended Audience This document contains two parts, namely, the commissioning guide and configuration guide. l

The commissioning guide describes how to commission the OptiX RTN 950, including preparations before commissioning, site commissioning, and system commissioning.

l

The configuration guide describes how to configure various types of services on the OptiX RTN 950, including basic concepts, configuration procedures, configuration examples, and related tasks.

The intended audience of this document are: l

Installation and commissioning engineers

l

Data configuration engineers

l

System maintenance engineers

Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol

Description Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


iii


About This Document

Symbol

Description Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.

General Conventions The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention

Description

Times New Roman

Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface

Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. For example, log in as user root.

Italic

Book titles are in italics.

Courier New

Examples of information displayed on the screen are in Courier New.

Command Conventions The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

iv

Convention

Description

Boldface

The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic

Command arguments are in italics.

[]

Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... }

Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


About This Document

Convention

Description

[ x | y | ... ]

Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.

{ x | y | ... }*

Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all items can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]*

Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

GUI Conventions The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention

Description

Boldface

Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK.

>

Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Change History Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains all updates made to previous issues.

Updates in Issue 02 (2011-05-20) Based on Product Version V100R003C01 This is the second document issue of the V100R003C01 product version. Compared with the first issue, the updated contents are follows. Update

Description

7 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Added with the example of configuring networkwide service data using the U2000.

8.1 U2000 Quick Start

Added with the quick start guide to the U2000.

Updates in Issue 01 (2011-03-10) Based on Product Version V100R003C01 This is the first document issue of the V100R003C01 product version. Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


v


Contents

Contents About This Document...................................................................................................................iii 1 Safety Precautions......................................................................................................................1-1 1.1 General Safety Precautions.............................................................................................................................1-2 1.2 Warning and Safety Symbols..........................................................................................................................1-3 1.3 Electrical Safety..............................................................................................................................................1-4 1.4 Environment of Flammable Gas.....................................................................................................................1-7 1.5 Storage Batteries.............................................................................................................................................1-7 1.6 Radiation.........................................................................................................................................................1-9 1.6.1 Safe Usage of Optical Fibers..................................................................................................................1-9 1.6.2 Electromagnetic Exposure....................................................................................................................1-11 1.6.3 Forbidden Areas...................................................................................................................................1-12 1.6.4 Laser.....................................................................................................................................................1-12 1.6.5 Microwave............................................................................................................................................1-13 1.7 Working at Heights.......................................................................................................................................1-13 1.7.1 Hoisting Heavy Objects.......................................................................................................................1-13 1.7.2 Using Ladders......................................................................................................................................1-14 1.8 Mechanical Safety.........................................................................................................................................1-16 1.9 Other Precautions..........................................................................................................................................1-17

2 Notices for High-Risk Operations..........................................................................................2-1 2.1 Operation Guide for the Toggle Lever Switch................................................................................................2-2 2.2 Operation Guide for the IF Jumper.................................................................................................................2-4 2.3 Operation Guide for the IF Cable....................................................................................................................2-5 2.4 Operation Guide for the IF Board...................................................................................................................2-6

3 Commissioning Preparations...................................................................................................3-1 3.1 Preparing Documents and Tools.....................................................................................................................3-2 3.2 Determining the Commissioning Method.......................................................................................................3-3 3.3 Checking Commissioning Conditions.............................................................................................................3-3 3.3.1 Site Commissioning...............................................................................................................................3-4 3.3.2 System Commissioning..........................................................................................................................3-4

4 Commissioning Process............................................................................................................4-1 4.1 Site Commissioning Process...........................................................................................................................4-2 4.2 System Commissioning Process......................................................................................................................4-2 Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


vii

Contents


5 Site Commissioning...................................................................................................................5-1 5.1 Powering On the Equipment...........................................................................................................................5-2 5.2 Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using the Web LCT.....................................................................5-4 5.2.1 Connecting the Web LCT to the IDU..................................................................................................5-10 5.2.2 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method.........................................................................................5-12 5.2.3 Logging In to an NE.............................................................................................................................5-13 5.2.4 Changing the NE ID.............................................................................................................................5-14 5.2.5 Changing the NE Name........................................................................................................................5-15 5.2.6 Setting NE Communication Parameters...............................................................................................5-16 5.2.7 Configuring Logical Boards.................................................................................................................5-17 5.2.8 Synchronizing NE Time.......................................................................................................................5-18 5.2.9 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Group...................................................................................................5-18 5.2.10 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link......................................................................5-19 5.2.11 Creating an XPIC Workgroup............................................................................................................5-21 5.2.12 Setting the AM Attributes of the XPIC Workgroup..........................................................................5-23 5.2.13 Checking Alarms................................................................................................................................5-23 5.3 Testing Connectivity of Cables.....................................................................................................................5-24 5.3.1 Testing Connectivity of Network Cables.............................................................................................5-25 5.3.2 Checking Fiber Jumper Connection.....................................................................................................5-26 5.4 Aligning the Antennas...................................................................................................................................5-28 5.4.1 Main Lobe and Side Lobes...................................................................................................................5-28 5.4.2 Aligning Single-Polarized Antennas....................................................................................................5-31 5.4.3 Aligning Dual-Polarized Antennas......................................................................................................5-34 5.5 Checking the Status of Radio Links..............................................................................................................5-36 5.6 Querying the DCN Status..............................................................................................................................5-37

6 System Commissioning............................................................................................................6-1 6.1 Configuring Networkwide Service Data.........................................................................................................6-2 6.2 Testing Ethernet Services................................................................................................................................6-2 6.3 Testing AM Switching....................................................................................................................................6-5 6.4 Testing Protection Switching..........................................................................................................................6-7 6.4.1 Testing IF 1+1 Switching.......................................................................................................................6-7 6.4.2 Testing ERPS Switching......................................................................................................................6-10 6.5 Checking the Clock Status............................................................................................................................6-12

7 Configuring Networkwide Service Data...............................................................................7-1 7.1 Basic Concepts................................................................................................................................................7-2 7.1.1 DCN.......................................................................................................................................................7-3 7.1.2 GNE and Non-GNE...............................................................................................................................7-6 7.1.3 NE ID and NE IP Address......................................................................................................................7-7 7.1.4 Physical Boards and Logical Boards......................................................................................................7-7 7.1.5 Adaptive Modulation..............................................................................................................................7-8 7.1.6 CCDP and XPIC.....................................................................................................................................7-9 7.1.7 RF Configuration Modes......................................................................................................................7-10 viii


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


Contents

7.1.8 Ethernet Port Numbers.........................................................................................................................7-11 7.1.9 IF_ETH Port.........................................................................................................................................7-11 7.1.10 Auto-Negotiation................................................................................................................................7-12 7.1.11 Flow Control Function.......................................................................................................................7-13 7.1.12 MAC Address Table Management.....................................................................................................7-15 7.1.13 Split Horizon Group...........................................................................................................................7-15 7.1.14 Protection for Native Ethernet Services.............................................................................................7-16 7.1.15 Clock Source......................................................................................................................................7-19 7.1.16 Clock Protection Modes.....................................................................................................................7-19 7.1.17 Clock Synchronization Policy............................................................................................................7-23 7.2 Configuration Procedure...............................................................................................................................7-26 7.2.1 Configuration Procedure (Network).....................................................................................................7-27 7.2.2 Configuration Procedure (Radio Link)................................................................................................7-37 7.2.3 Configuration Procedure (IEEE 802.1q Bridge-Based E-LAN Services)...........................................7-40 7.2.4 Configuration Procedure (Clocks).......................................................................................................7-48 7.3 Configuration Example (Networkwide Data Services).................................................................................7-49 7.3.1 Network Diagram.................................................................................................................................7-50 7.3.2 Service Planning (Network).................................................................................................................7-53 7.3.3 Service Planning (Radio Links)...........................................................................................................7-54 7.3.4 Service Planning (Ethernet Ports)........................................................................................................7-58 7.3.5 Service Planning (Ethernet Protection)................................................................................................7-61 7.3.6 Service Planning (Ethernet Services)...................................................................................................7-63 7.3.7 Service Planning (QoS Information)....................................................................................................7-64 7.3.8 Service Planning (Clocks)....................................................................................................................7-65 7.3.9 Configuration Process (Network).........................................................................................................7-66 7.3.10 Configuration Process (Radio Links).................................................................................................7-70 7.3.11 Configuration Process (Ethernet Ports)..............................................................................................7-72 7.3.12 Configuration Process (Ethernet Protection)......................................................................................7-73 7.3.13 Configuration Process (Ethernet Services)........................................................................................7-74 7.3.14 Configuration Process (QoS).............................................................................................................7-75 7.3.15 Configuration Process (Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations).................................................7-78 7.3.16 Configuration Process (Clocks).........................................................................................................7-81

8 Task Collection...........................................................................................................................8-1 8.1 U2000 Quick Start...........................................................................................................................................8-2 8.1.1 Logging in to a U2000 Client.................................................................................................................8-2 8.1.2 Shutting Down a U2000 Client..............................................................................................................8-3 8.1.3 Using Online Help..................................................................................................................................8-3 8.1.4 Navigating to Common Views...............................................................................................................8-4 8.1.4.1 Navigating to the Main Topology.......................................................................................................8-4 8.1.4.2 Navigating to the NE Explorer............................................................................................................8-5 8.1.4.3 Navigating to the NE Panel.................................................................................................................8-6 8.2 Network Management.....................................................................................................................................8-7 Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


ix

Contents

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide (U2000) 8.2.1 Managing NEs........................................................................................................................................8-8 8.2.1.1 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method........................................................................................8-9 8.2.1.2 Creating NEs by Using the Manual Method.....................................................................................8-10 8.2.1.3 Configuring the Logical Board.........................................................................................................8-12 8.2.1.4 Changing the NE ID..........................................................................................................................8-13 8.2.1.5 Changing the NE Name.....................................................................................................................8-13 8.2.1.6 Synchronizing the NE Time..............................................................................................................8-14 8.2.1.7 Localizing the NE Time....................................................................................................................8-17 8.2.1.8 Configuring Standard NTP Keys......................................................................................................8-17 8.2.2 Configuring the NE Data......................................................................................................................8-18 8.2.2.1 Uploading the NE Data.....................................................................................................................8-19 8.2.3 Configuring the Performance Monitoring Status of NEs.....................................................................8-19 8.2.4 Connecting Fibers or Cables................................................................................................................8-20 8.2.4.1 Creating Optical Fibers by Using the Search Method.......................................................................8-21 8.2.4.2 Creating Fibers Manually..................................................................................................................8-22 8.2.4.3 Creating an Extended ECC...............................................................................................................8-22 8.2.4.4 Creating a Back-to-Back Radio Connection.....................................................................................8-23 8.2.5 Managing Subnets................................................................................................................................8-24 8.2.5.1 Creating a Subnet..............................................................................................................................8-24 8.2.5.2 Copying Topology Objects...............................................................................................................8-26 8.2.5.3 Moving Topology Objects................................................................................................................8-26 8.2.6 Managing Communication...................................................................................................................8-27 8.2.6.1 Setting NE Communication Parameters............................................................................................8-28 8.2.6.2 Configuring DCCs.............................................................................................................................8-29 8.2.6.3 Configuring Extended ECC Communication....................................................................................8-30 8.2.6.4 Creating Static IP Routes..................................................................................................................8-32 8.2.6.5 Setting OSPF Protocol Parameters....................................................................................................8-33 8.2.6.6 Enabling the Proxy ARP...................................................................................................................8-34 8.2.6.7 Configuring the VLAN ID and Bandwidth Used by an Inband DCN..............................................8-34 8.2.6.8 Configuring the Enable Status of the Inband DCN Function on Ports.............................................8-35 8.2.6.9 Configuring the Protocol Type of the Inband DCN..........................................................................8-36 8.2.6.10 Querying ECC Routes.....................................................................................................................8-37 8.2.6.11 Querying IP Routes.........................................................................................................................8-37 8.2.6.12 Configuring Access Control............................................................................................................8-38 8.2.6.13 Setting SNMP Communications Parameters...................................................................................8-39 8.2.7 Configuring Service Access of NEs ....................................................................................................8-39 8.2.7.1 Configuring LCT Access to NEs......................................................................................................8-40 8.2.7.2 Configuring Ethernet Access to NEs................................................................................................8-40 8.2.7.3 Configuring Serial Port Access to NEs.............................................................................................8-41 8.2.8 Configuring an NE User.......................................................................................................................8-42 8.2.8.1 Creating an NE User.........................................................................................................................8-42 8.2.8.2 Changing the Password of an NE User.............................................................................................8-44

x


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


Contents

8.2.8.3 Setting Warning Screen Parameters..................................................................................................8-45 8.2.8.4 Switching NE Users..........................................................................................................................8-45 8.2.9 Configuring SSL Protocol Communication.........................................................................................8-46 8.2.9.1 Configuring SSL Protocol Communication Between a U2000 Server and its Clients.....................8-46 8.2.9.2 Configuring the Connection Mode Between a U2000 Client and Its Gateway NE..........................8-47 8.3 Managing Radio Links..................................................................................................................................8-49 8.3.1 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Group...................................................................................................8-50 8.3.2 Creating an XPIC Workgroup..............................................................................................................8-51 8.3.3 Configuring the Power to Be Received for the ODUs in an XPIC Workgroup...................................8-52 8.3.4 Setting the AM Attributes of the XPIC Workgroup............................................................................8-53 8.3.5 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link........................................................................8-54 8.3.6 Querying the IF 1+1 Protection Status.................................................................................................8-56 8.3.7 IF 1+1 Protection Switching................................................................................................................8-57 8.4 Managing Ports.............................................................................................................................................8-58 8.4.1 Setting Ethernet Port Parameters..........................................................................................................8-58 8.4.1.1 Setting the Basic Attributes of Ethernet Ports...................................................................................8-58 8.4.1.2 Configuring the Traffic Control of Ethernet Ports............................................................................8-60 8.4.1.3 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes of Ethernet Ports...............................................................................8-60 8.4.1.4 Setting the Advanced Attributes of Ethernet Ports...........................................................................8-62 8.4.2 Setting IF_ETH Port Parameters..........................................................................................................8-62 8.4.2.1 Setting the Basic Attributes of IF_ETH Ports...................................................................................8-62 8.4.2.2 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes of IF_ETH Ports...............................................................................8-63 8.4.2.3 Setting the Advanced Attributes of IF_ETH Ports............................................................................8-64 8.4.3 Setting IF Port Parameters....................................................................................................................8-65 8.4.3.1 Setting IF Attributes..........................................................................................................................8-65 8.4.3.2 Configuring ATPC Attributes...........................................................................................................8-66 8.4.3.3 Querying the AM Status....................................................................................................................8-67 8.4.3.4 Querying ATPC Adjustment Records...............................................................................................8-68 8.4.4 Setting ODU Port Parameters..............................................................................................................8-68 8.4.4.1 Setting ODU Transmit Frequency Attributes....................................................................................8-69 8.4.4.2 Querying ODU Information..............................................................................................................8-69 8.4.4.3 Setting ODU Power Attributes..........................................................................................................8-70 8.4.4.4 Setting ODU Advanced Attributes....................................................................................................8-71 8.4.4.5 Setting the ODU Transmitter State...................................................................................................8-72 8.4.4.6 Querying the Historical Transmit Power and Receive Power...........................................................8-72 8.5 Configuring Ethernet Services and Features on the Packet Plane.................................................................8-73 8.5.1 Managing the LAG...............................................................................................................................8-74 8.5.1.1 Creating a LAG.................................................................................................................................8-74 8.5.1.2 Setting LAG Parameters....................................................................................................................8-76 8.5.1.3 Querying the Protocol Information of the LAG................................................................................8-77 8.5.2 Managing ERPS...................................................................................................................................8-78 8.5.2.1 Creating Ethernet Ring Protection Instances....................................................................................8-78 Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


xi

Contents

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide (U2000) 8.5.2.2 Setting the Parameters of Ethernet Ring Protocol.............................................................................8-79 8.5.2.3 Querying the Status of the Ethernet Ring Protocol...........................................................................8-80 8.5.3 Configuring Ethernet Services.............................................................................................................8-80 8.5.3.1 Configuring IEEE 802.1d Bridge-Based E-LAN Services...............................................................8-81 8.5.3.2 Configuring IEEE 802.1q Bridge-Based E-LAN Services...............................................................8-82 8.5.3.3 Changing Logical Ports Connected to a VB.....................................................................................8-84 8.5.3.4 Deleting E-LAN Services..................................................................................................................8-85 8.5.4 Managing the MAC Address Table.....................................................................................................8-85 8.5.4.1 Creating a Static MAC Address Entry..............................................................................................8-86 8.5.4.2 Creating a Blacklist Entry of MAC Addresses.................................................................................8-86 8.5.4.3 Configuring the Aging Parameters of a MAC Address Table..........................................................8-87 8.5.4.4 Querying or Deleting a Dynamic MAC Address..............................................................................8-88 8.5.5 Setting the Mode for Processing an Unknown Frame of the E-LAN Service.....................................8-88 8.5.6 Managing the QoS................................................................................................................................8-89 8.5.6.1 Creating a DS Domain......................................................................................................................8-89 8.5.6.2 Modifying the Mapping Relationships for the DS Domain..............................................................8-91 8.5.6.3 Changing the Ports Applied to a DS Domain and Their Trusted Packet Types...............................8-93 8.5.6.4 Creating a Port Policy.......................................................................................................................8-94 8.5.6.5 Modifying the Port Policy.................................................................................................................8-95 8.5.6.6 Creating Traffic.................................................................................................................................8-96 8.5.6.7 Setting the Port That Uses the Port Policy........................................................................................8-97 8.5.6.8 Configuring Port Shaping..................................................................................................................8-99 8.5.6.9 Querying the Port Policy.................................................................................................................8-100 8.5.6.10 Querying the DS Domain of a Port...............................................................................................8-101 8.5.7 Using the IEEE 802.1ag OAM...........................................................................................................8-101 8.5.7.1 Creating an MD...............................................................................................................................8-102 8.5.7.2 Creating an MA...............................................................................................................................8-103 8.5.7.3 Creating MEPs................................................................................................................................8-104 8.5.7.4 Creating Remote MEPs in an MA...................................................................................................8-105 8.5.7.5 Creating MIPs.................................................................................................................................8-106 8.5.7.6 Performing a CC Test......................................................................................................................8-106 8.5.7.7 Performing an LB Test....................................................................................................................8-107 8.5.7.8 Performing an LT Test....................................................................................................................8-108 8.5.8 Using the IEEE 802.3ah OAM ..........................................................................................................8-110 8.5.8.1 Enabling the OAM Auto-Discovery Function................................................................................8-110 8.5.8.2 Enabling the Link Event Notification ............................................................................................8-111 8.5.8.3 Modifying the OAM Error Frame Monitoring Threshold .............................................................8-112 8.5.8.4 Performing Remote Loopbacks.......................................................................................................8-113 8.5.8.5 Enabling Self-Loop Detection.........................................................................................................8-114 8.5.9 Using the RMON...............................................................................................................................8-114 8.5.9.1 Browsing the Performance Data in the Statistics Group of an Ethernet Port..................................8-115 8.5.9.2 Configuring an Alarm Group for an Ethernet Port.........................................................................8-115

xii


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


Contents

8.5.9.3 Configuring a Historical Control Group.........................................................................................8-116 8.5.9.4 Browsing the Performance Data in the Historical Group of an Ethernet Port................................8-116 8.6 Managing the Clock....................................................................................................................................8-117 8.6.1 Configuring the Clock Sources..........................................................................................................8-118 8.6.2 Configuring Clock Subnets................................................................................................................8-119 8.6.3 User-Defined Clock Quality...............................................................................................................8-119 8.6.4 Configuring the SSM Output Status...................................................................................................8-120 8.6.5 Configuring the Clock ID Output Status............................................................................................8-121 8.6.6 Modifying the Recovery Parameter of the Clock Source...................................................................8-122 8.6.7 Querying the Clock Synchronization Status......................................................................................8-122

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


xiii


Figures

Figures Figure 1-1 Wearing an ESD wrist strap...............................................................................................................1-7 Figure 1-2 Slanting optical interface..................................................................................................................1-11 Figure 1-3 Level optical interface......................................................................................................................1-11 Figure 1-4 Hoisting heavy objects......................................................................................................................1-14 Figure 1-5 Slanting a ladder...............................................................................................................................1-15 Figure 1-6 Ladder top being one meter higher than the roof.............................................................................1-16 Figure 2-1 Toggle lever switch............................................................................................................................2-2 Figure 5-1 Normal state........................................................................................................................................5-3 Figure 5-2 Normal state........................................................................................................................................5-4 Figure 5-3 Configuration flowchart.....................................................................................................................5-6 Figure 5-4 Testing the Ethernet service cable....................................................................................................5-25 Figure 5-5 Connection diagram for checking the fiber connection by using an SFP optical module................5-27 Figure 5-6 Main lobe and side lobes..................................................................................................................5-28 Figure 5-7 Horizontal section and front view of the antenna.............................................................................5-29 Figure 5-8 Three tracking paths.........................................................................................................................5-30 Figure 5-9 Aligning the antenna with the first side lobe....................................................................................5-31 Figure 5-10 Testing the RSSI voltage by using a multimeter............................................................................5-33 Figure 5-11 Hop management............................................................................................................................5-38 Figure 6-1 Networking diagram for testing Ethernet services.............................................................................6-2 Figure 6-2 Configuration for testing IF 1+1 switching........................................................................................6-8 Figure 6-3 Configuration for testing ERPS........................................................................................................6-10 Figure 7-1 IP over DCC solution.........................................................................................................................7-4 Figure 7-2 Inband DCN solution..........................................................................................................................7-4 Figure 7-3 HWECC solution................................................................................................................................7-5 Figure 7-4 Adaptive modulation..........................................................................................................................7-9 Figure 7-5 Single-polarized transmission...........................................................................................................7-10 Figure 7-6 CCDP transmission...........................................................................................................................7-10 Figure 7-7 Split horizon group...........................................................................................................................7-16 Figure 7-8 Implementation of ERPS..................................................................................................................7-17 Figure 7-9 LAG..................................................................................................................................................7-18 Figure 7-10 Prevention of network loops on the access side.............................................................................7-19 Figure 7-11 Clock source protection based on priorities....................................................................................7-20 Figure 7-12 SSM protection...............................................................................................................................7-21 Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


xv


Figures

Figure 7-13 Extended SSM protection...............................................................................................................7-23 Figure 7-14 Clock synchronization policy for a chain network.........................................................................7-24 Figure 7-15 Clock synchronization policy for a tree network............................................................................7-25 Figure 7-16 Clock synchronization policy for a ring network...........................................................................7-26 Figure 7-17 Clock synchronization policy for a port aggregation network....................................................... 7-26 Figure 7-18 Configuration flowchart (network topology)..................................................................................7-28 Figure 7-19 Configuration flowchart (IP radio links)........................................................................................7-37 Figure 7-20 Configuration flowchart (IEEE 802.1q bridge-based E-LAN services).........................................7-40 Figure 7-21 Configuration flowchart (clocks)....................................................................................................7-48 Figure 7-22 Network diagram (network topology)............................................................................................7-52 Figure 7-23 Network diagram (board configuration).........................................................................................7-53 Figure 7-24 Allocated IDs and IP addresses (IP radio ring network)................................................................ 7-54 Figure 7-25 Basic information about radio links................................................................................................7-55 Figure 7-26 Clock source information (IP radio ring network)......................................................................... 7-66 Figure 8-1 Main topology.....................................................................................................................................8-5 Figure 8-2 NE explorer.........................................................................................................................................8-6

xvi


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


Tables

Tables Table 1-1 Warning and safety symbols of the OptiX RTN 950...........................................................................1-3 Table 3-1 Tools and meters..................................................................................................................................3-2 Table 4-1 Configuring site commissioning data by using the Web LCT.............................................................4-2 Table 4-2 System commissioning process............................................................................................................4-3 Table 5-1 Fuse currents........................................................................................................................................5-2 Table 5-2 Status of indicators...............................................................................................................................5-3 Table 5-3 Procedure for configuring NE data......................................................................................................5-7 Table 5-4 Procedure for configuring an IP radio link (XPIC disabled)...............................................................5-7 Table 5-5 Procedure for configuring an IP radio link (XPIC enabled)................................................................5-8 Table 7-1 Comparison between the IP over DCC solution, the inband DCN solution, and the HWECC solution ...............................................................................................................................................................................7-6 Table 7-2 Mappings between the physical boards and logical boards.................................................................7-7 Table 7-3 Auto-negotiation rules for FE electrical ports (when the local FE electrical port works in auto-negotiation mode)...................................................................................................................................................................7-12 Table 7-4 Auto-negotiation rules for GE electrical ports (when the local GE electrical port works in auto-negotiation mode)...................................................................................................................................................................7-13 Table 7-5 Procedure for creating NEs................................................................................................................7-29 Table 7-6 Procedure for setting NE attributes....................................................................................................7-30 Table 7-7 Procedure for configuring logical boards...........................................................................................7-30 Table 7-8 Procedure for setting NE communications parameters......................................................................7-31 Table 7-9 Procedure for configuring DCCs.......................................................................................................7-31 Table 7-10 Procedure for configuring extended ECC........................................................................................7-32 Table 7-11 Procedure for querying ECC routes.................................................................................................7-32 Table 7-12 Procedure for setting NE communications parameters....................................................................7-32 Table 7-13 Procedure for configuring the IP over DCC solution.......................................................................7-33 Table 7-14 Procedure for configuring the inband DCN solution.......................................................................7-33 Table 7-15 Procedure for configuring extended ECC communication..............................................................7-34 Table 7-16 Procedure for querying IP routes.....................................................................................................7-34 Table 7-17 Procedure for synchronizing the NE time........................................................................................7-35 Table 7-18 Procedure for setting the performance monitoring status................................................................7-36 Table 7-19 Procedures for creating fibers/cables and subnets............................................................................7-36 Table 7-20 Procedure for configuring an IP radio link (XPIC enabled)............................................................7-38 Table 7-21 Procedure for configuring an IP radio link (XPIC disabled)...........................................................7-39 Table 7-22 Procedure for configuring Ethernet ports.........................................................................................7-41 Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


xvii

Tables

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide (U2000) Table 7-23 Procedure for configuring IF_ETH ports.........................................................................................7-42 Table 7-24 Procedures for configuring ERPS protection...................................................................................7-42 Table 7-25 Procedures for configuring a LAG...................................................................................................7-44 Table 7-26 Procedure for configuring IEEE 802.1q bridge-based E-LAN services..........................................7-45 Table 7-27 Procedures for configuring QoS.......................................................................................................7-46 Table 7-28 Procedures for verifying Ethernet service configurations................................................................7-47 Table 7-29 Procedure for configuring clocks.....................................................................................................7-48 Table 7-30 Ethernet service capacity of each BTS/NodeB................................................................................7-51 Table 7-31 Basic information about radio links.................................................................................................7-54 Table 7-32 Hybrid/AM attribute information.....................................................................................................7-56 Table 7-33 Power and ATPC information..........................................................................................................7-56 Table 7-34 IF board information........................................................................................................................7-57 Table 7-35 Ethernet port information (NE1)......................................................................................................7-58 Table 7-36 Ethernet port information (NE2)......................................................................................................7-59 Table 7-37 Ethernet port information (NE3)......................................................................................................7-59 Table 7-38 Ethernet port information (NE4)......................................................................................................7-60 Table 7-39 IF_ETH port information (NE1 to NE4)..........................................................................................7-61 Table 7-40 LAG information..............................................................................................................................7-62 Table 7-41 Information about ERPS instances...................................................................................................7-62 Table 7-42 Information about IEEE 802.1q bridge-based E-LAN services.......................................................7-63 Table 7-43 Service type and PHB service class.................................................................................................7-64 Table 7-44 Queue scheduling policies................................................................................................................7-65

xviii


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


1 Safety Precautions

1

Safety Precautions

About This Chapter This topic describes the safety precautions that you must follow when installing, operating, and maintaining Huawei devices. 1.1 General Safety Precautions This topic describes essential safety precautions that instruct you in the selection of measuring and testing instruments when you install, operate, and maintain Huawei devices. 1.2 Warning and Safety Symbols Before using the equipment, note the following warning and safety symbols on the equipment. 1.3 Electrical Safety This topic describes safety precautions for high voltage, lightning strikes, high leakage current, power cables, fuses, and ESD. 1.4 Environment of Flammable Gas This topic describes safety precautions for the operating environment of a device. 1.5 Storage Batteries This topic describes safety precautions for operations of storage batteries. 1.6 Radiation This topic describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure and lasers. 1.7 Working at Heights This topic describes safety precautions for working at heights. 1.8 Mechanical Safety This topic describes safety precautions for drilling holes, handling sharp objects, operating fans, and carrying heavy objects. 1.9 Other Precautions This topic describes safety precautions for removing and inserting boards, binding signal cables, and routing cables.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


1-1



1.1 General Safety Precautions This topic describes essential safety precautions that instruct you in the selection of measuring and testing instruments when you install, operate, and maintain Huawei devices.

All Safety Precautions To ensure the safety of humans and a device, follow the marks on the device and all the safety precautions in this document when installing, operating, and maintaining a device. The "CAUTION", "WARNING", and "DANGER" marks in this document do not cover all the safety precautions that must be followed. They are supplements to the safety precautions.

Local Laws and Regulations When operating a device, always comply with the local laws and regulations. The safety precautions provided in the documents are in addition/supplementary to the local laws and regulations.

Basic Installation Requirements The installation and maintenance personnel of Huawei devices must receive strict training and be familiar with the proper operation methods and safety precautions before any operation. l

Only trained and qualified personnel are permitted to install, operate, and maintain a device.

l

Only certified professionals are permitted to remove the safety facilities, and to troubleshoot and maintain the device.

l

Only the personnel authenticated or authorized by Huawei are permitted to replace or change the device or parts of the device (including software).

l

The operating personnel must immediately report the faults or errors that may cause safety problems to the person in charge.

Grounding Requirements The grounding requirements are applicable to the device that needs to be grounded. l

When installing the device, always connect the grounding facilities first. When removing the device, always disconnect the grounding facilities last.

l

Ensure that the grounding conductor is intact.

l

Do not operate the device in the absence of a suitably installed grounding conductor.

l

The device must be connected to the PGND permanently. Before operating the device, check the electrical connections of the device, and ensure that the device is properly grounded.

Human Safety

1-2

l

When there is a risk of a lightning strike, do not operate the fixed terminal or touch the cables.

l

When there is risk of a lightning strike, unplug the AC power connector. Do not use the fixed terminal or touch the terminal or antenna connector. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



NOTE

The preceding requirements apply to wireless fixed station terminals.

l

To avoid electric shocks, do not connect safety extra-low voltage (SELV) circuits to telephone-network voltage (TNV) circuits.

l

Do not look into optical ports without eye protection. Otherwise, human eyes may be hurt by laser beams.

l

Before operating the device, wear an ESD protective coat, ESD gloves, and an ESD wrist strap. In addition, you need to get off the conductive objects, such as jewelry and watches, to prevent electric shock and burn.

l

In case of fire, escape from the building or site where the device is located and press the fire alarm bell or dial the telephone number for fire alarms. Do not enter the burning building again in any situation.

l

Before any operation, install the device firmly on the ground or other rigid objects, such as on a wall or in a rack.

l

When the system is working, ensure that the ventilation hole is not blocked.

l

When installing the front panel, use a tool to tighten the screws firmly, if required.

l

After installing the device, clean up the packing materials.

Device Safety

1.2 Warning and Safety Symbols Before using the equipment, note the following warning and safety symbols on the equipment. Table 1-1 lists the warning and safety symbols of the OptiX RTN 950 and their meanings. Table 1-1 Warning and safety symbols of the OptiX RTN 950 Symbol

Indication This symbol is for ESD protection. A notice with this symbol indicates that you should wear an ESD wrist strap or glove when you touch a board. Otherwise, you may cause damage to the board. This symbol is for the laser class.

CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

A notice with this symbol indicates the class of the laser. Avoid direct exposure to the laser beams. Otherwise, it may damage you eyes or skin.

LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


1-3



Symbol

Indication A notice with this symbol indicates where the subrack is grounded.

A notice with this symbol indicates that the air filter should ATTENTION 警告 be cleaned periodically. CLEAN PERIODICALLY定期清洗

严禁在风扇高速旋转时接触叶片 DON'T TOUCH THE FAN LEAVES BEFORE THEY SLOW DOWN !

This symbol is for fan safety. A notice with this symbol indicates that the fan leaves should not be touched when the fan is rotating.

1.3 Electrical Safety This topic describes safety precautions for high voltage, lightning strikes, high leakage current, power cables, fuses, and ESD.

High Voltage

DANGER l A high-voltage power supply provides power for device operations. Direct human contact with the high voltage power supply or human contact through damp objects can be fatal. l Unspecified or unauthorized high voltage operations could result in fire or electric shock, or both.

Thunderstorm The requirements apply only to wireless base stations or devices with antennas and feeders.

DANGER Do not perform operations on high voltage, AC power, towers, or backstays in stormy weather conditions.

1-4


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



High Leakage Current

WARNING Before powering on a device, ground the device. Otherwise, the safety of humans and the device cannot be ensured. If a high leakage current mark is labeled near the power connector of the device, you must connect the PGND terminal on the shell to the ground before connecting the device to an A/C input power supply. This is to prevent the electric shock caused by leakage current of the device.

Power Cables

DANGER Do not install or remove the power cable with a live line. Transient contact between the core of the power cable and the conductor may generate electric arc or spark, which may cause fire or eye injury. l

Before installing or removing power cables, you must power off the device.

l

Before connecting a power cable, you must ensure that the label on the power cable is correct.

Device with Power On

DANGER Installing or removing a device is prohibited if the device is on.

DANGER Do not install or remove the power cables of the equipment when it is powered on.

Short Circuits When installing and maintaining devices, place and use the associated tools and instruments in accordance with regulations to avoid short-circuits caused by metal objects.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


1-5



CAUTION To avoid short-circuits when using a tool (such as a screwdriver), do not place the tool on the ventilation plate of the subrack.

CAUTION Prevent any screws from dropping into the subrack or chassis to avoid short-circuits.

Fuse

WARNING If the fuse on a device blows, replace the fuse with a fuse of the same type and specifications to ensure safe operation of the device.

Electrostatic Discharge

CAUTION The static electricity generated by the human body may damage the electrostatic sensitive components on the board, such as the large-scale integrated circuit (LSI). l

The human body can generate static electromagnetic fields in the following situations: physical movement, clothing friction, friction between shoes and the ground, plastics in the hand. Such static electromagnetic effects can remain for an appreciable time.

l

Before operating a device, circuit boards, or ASICs, wear an ESD wrist strap that is properly grounded. The ESD wrist strap can prevent the electrostatic-sensitive components from being damaged by the static electricity in the human body.

Figure 1-1 shows the method of wearing an ESD wrist strap.

1-6


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



Figure 1-1 Wearing an ESD wrist strap

1.4 Environment of Flammable Gas This topic describes safety precautions for the operating environment of a device.

DANGER Do not place or operate devices in an environment of flammable or explosive air or gas. Operating an electronic device in an environment of flammable gas causes a severe hazard.

1.5 Storage Batteries This topic describes safety precautions for operations of storage batteries.

DANGER Before operating a storage battery, you must read the safety precautions carefully and be familiar with the method of connecting a storage battery. l

Incorrect operations of storage batteries cause hazards. During operation, prevent any shortcircuit, and prevent the electrolyte from overflowing or leakage.

l

If the electrolyte overflows, it causes potential hazards to the device. The electrolyte may corrode metal parts and the circuit boards, and ultimately damage the circuit boards.

l

A storage battery contains a great deal of energy. Misoperations may cause a short-circuit, which leads to human injuries.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


1-7



Basic Precautions To ensure safety, note the following points before installing or maintaining the storage battery: l

Use special insulation tools.

l

Wear an eye protector and take effective protection measures.

l

Wear rubber gloves and a protection coat to prevent the hazard caused by the overflowing electrolyte.

l

When handling the storage battery, ensure that its electrodes are upward. Leaning or reversing the storage battery is prohibited.

l

Before installing or maintaining the storage battery, ensure that the storage battery is disconnected from the power supply that charges the storage battery.

Short-Circuit

DANGER A battery short-circuit may cause human injuries. Although the voltage of an ordinary battery is low, the instantaneous high current caused by a short-circuit emits a great deal of energy. Avoid any short-circuit of batteries caused by metal objects. If possible, disconnect the working battery before performing other operations.

Hazardous Gas

CAUTION Do not use any unsealed lead-acid storage battery. Lay a storage battery horizontally and fix it properly to prevent the battery from emitting flammable gas, which may cause fire or device erosion. Working lead-acid storage batteries emit flammable gas. Therefore, ventilation and fireproofing measures must be taken at the sites where lead-acid storage batteries are placed.

Battery Temperature

CAUTION If a battery overheats, the battery may be deformed or damaged, and the electrolyte may overflow. When the temperature of the battery is higher than 60°C, you need to check whether the electrolyte overflows. If the electrolyte overflows, take appropriate measures immediately. 1-8


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



Battery Leakage

CAUTION In the event of acid overflow or spillage, neutralize the acid and clean it up appropriately. When handling a leaky battery, protect against the possible damage caused by the acid. When you find the electrolyte leaks, you can use the following substances to counteract and absorb the leaking electrolyte: l

Sodium bicarbonate (NaHCO3)

l

Sodium carbonate (Na2CO3)

In the event of acid overflow or spillage, neutralize the acid and clean it up as recommended by the battery manufacturer and any local regulations for acid disposal. If a person contacts battery electrolyte, clean the skin that contacts the battery electrolyte immediately by using water. In case of a severe situation, the person must be sent to a hospital immediately.

1.6 Radiation This topic describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure and lasers. 1.6.1 Safe Usage of Optical Fibers The laser beam can cause damage to your eyes. Hence, you must exercise caution when using optical fibers. 1.6.2 Electromagnetic Exposure This topic describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure. 1.6.3 Forbidden Areas The topic describes requirements for a forbidden area. 1.6.4 Laser This topic describes safety precautions for lasers. 1.6.5 Microwave When installing and maintaining the equipment of Huawei, follow the safety precautions of microwave to ensure the safety of the human body and the equipment.

1.6.1 Safe Usage of Optical Fibers The laser beam can cause damage to your eyes. Hence, you must exercise caution when using optical fibers.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


1-9



DANGER When installing or maintaining an optical interface board or optical fibers, avoid direct eye exposure to the laser beams launched from the optical interface board or fiber connectors. The laser beam can cause damage to your eyes.

Cleaning Fiber Connectors and Optical Interfaces

CAUTION If fiber connectors or flanges are contaminated, optical power commissioning is seriously affected. Therefore, the two endfaces and flange of every external fiber must be cleaned before the fiber is led into the equipment through the ODF for being inserted into an optical interface on the equipment. The fiber connectors and optical interfaces of the lasers must be cleaned with the following special cleaning tools and materials: l

Special cleaning solvent: It is preferred to use isoamylol. Propyl alcohol, however, can also be used. It is prohibited that you use alcohol and formalin.

l

Non-woven lens tissue

l

Special compressed gas

l

Cotton stick (medical cotton or long fiber cotton)

l

Special cleaning roll, used with the recommended cleaning solvent

l

Special magnifier for fiber connectors

For cleaning steps, see Task Collection "Cleaning Fiber Connectors and Adapters" in the OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance and Troubleshooting.

Replacing Optical Fibers When replacing an optical fiber, cover the fiber connector of the unused optical fiber with a protective cap.

Connecting Optical Fibers l

Use an attenuator if the optical power is excessively high. A high received optical power damages the optical interface.

l

Directly connect an attenuator to a slanting optical interface. Install the attenuator on the IN port instead of the OUT port.

l

Do not directly connect an attenuator to the level optical interface. Use the optical distribution frame (ODF) to connect an attenuator to a level optical interface.

Figure 1-2 shows a slanting optical interface, and Figure 1-3 shows a level optical interface.

1-10


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



Figure 1-2 Slanting optical interface

Slanting optical interface

Figure 1-3 Level optical interface

Level optical interface

1.6.2 Electromagnetic Exposure This topic describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure. If multiple transmit antennas are installed on a tower or backstay, keep away from the transmit directions of the antennas when you install or maintain an antenna locally.

CAUTION Ensure that all personnel are beyond the transmit direction of a working antenna.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


1-11



1.6.3 Forbidden Areas The topic describes requirements for a forbidden area. l

Before entering an area where the electromagnetic radiation is beyond the specified range, the associated personnel must shut down the electromagnetic radiator or stay at least 10 meters away from the electromagnetic radiator, if in the transmit direction.

l

A physical barrier and an eye-catching warning flag should be available in each forbidden area.

1.6.4 Laser This topic describes safety precautions for lasers.

WARNING When handling optical fibers, do not stand close to, or look into the optical fiber outlet directly without eye protection. Laser transceivers are used in the optical transmission system and associated test tools. The laser transmitted through the bare optical fiber produces a small beam of light, and therefore it has very high power density and is invisible to human eyes. When a beam of light enters eyes, the eyes may be damaged. In normal cases, viewing an un-terminated optical fiber or a damaged optical fiber without eye protection at a distance greater than 150 mm does not cause eye injury. Eye injury may occur, however, if an optical tool such as a microscope, magnifying glass, or eye loupe is used to view an un-terminated optical fiber.

Safety Instructions Regarding Lasers To avoid laser radiation, obey the following instructions: l

All operations should be performed by authorized personnel who have completed the required training courses.

l

Wear a pair of eye-protective glasses when you are handling lasers or fibers.

l

Ensure that the optical source is switched off before disconnecting optical fiber connectors.

l

Do not look into the end of an exposed fiber or an open connector when you are not sure whether the optical source is switched off.

l

Use an optical power meter to measure the optical power and ensure that the optical source is switched off.

l

Before opening the front door of an optical transmission device, ensure that you are not exposed to laser radiation.

l

Do not use an optical tool such as a microscope, a magnifying glass, or an eye loupe to view the optical connector or fiber that is transmitting optical signals.

Instructions Regarding Fiber Handling Read and abide by the following instructions before handling fibers: 1-12


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



l

Only trained personnel are permitted to cut and splice fibers.

l

Before cutting or splicing a fiber, ensure that the fiber is disconnected from the optical source. After disconnecting the fiber, cap to the fiber connectors.

1.6.5 Microwave When installing and maintaining the equipment of Huawei, follow the safety precautions of microwave to ensure the safety of the human body and the equipment.

WARNING Strong radio frequency can harm the human body. When installing or maintaining an aerial on the tower or mast that is installed with multiple aerials, switch off the transmitter in advance.

1.7 Working at Heights This topic describes safety precautions for working at heights.

WARNING When working at heights, be cautious to prevent objects from falling down. The requirements for working at heights are as follows: l

The personnel who work at heights must be trained.

l

Carry and handle the operating machines and tools with caution to prevent them from falling down.

l

Safety measures, such as wearing a helmet and a safety belt, must be taken.

l

Wear cold-proof clothes when working at heights in cold areas.

l

Check all lifting appliances thoroughly before starting the work, and ensure that they are intact.

1.7.1 Hoisting Heavy Objects This topic describes the safety precautions for hoisting heavy objects that you must follow when installing, operating, and maintaining Huawei devices. 1.7.2 Using Ladders This topic describes safety precautions for using ladders.

1.7.1 Hoisting Heavy Objects This topic describes the safety precautions for hoisting heavy objects that you must follow when installing, operating, and maintaining Huawei devices. Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


1-13



WARNING When heavy objects are being hoisted, do not walk below the cantilever or hoisted objects. l

Only trained and qualified personnel can perform hoisting operations.

l

Before hoisting heavy objects, check that the hoisting tools are complete and in good condition.

l

Before hoisting heavy objects, ensure that the hoisting tools are fixed to a secure object or wall with good weight-bearing capacity.

l

Issue orders with short and explicit words to ensure correct operations.

l

Ensure that the angle between the two cables is less than or equal to 90 degrees during the lifting, as shown in Figure 1-4.

Figure 1-4 Hoisting heavy objects

1.7.2 Using Ladders This topic describes safety precautions for using ladders.

1-14


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



Checking Ladders l

Before using a ladder, check whether the ladder is damaged. After checking that the ladder is in good condition, you can use the ladder.

l

Before using a ladder, you should know the maximum weight capacity of the ladder. Avoid overweighing the ladder.

Placing Ladders The proper slant angle of the ladder is 75 degrees. You can measure the slant angle of the ladder with an angle square or your arms, as shown in Figure 1-5. When using a ladder, to prevent the ladder from sliding, ensure that the wider feet of the ladder are downward, or take protection measures for the ladder feet. Ensure that the ladder is placed securely. Figure 1-5 Slanting a ladder

Climbing Up a Ladder When climbing up a ladder, pay attention to the following points: l

Ensure that the center of gravity of your body does not deviate from the edges of the two long sides.

l

Before operations, ensure that your body is stable to reduce risks.

l

Do not climb higher than the fourth rung of the ladder (counted from up to down).

If you want to climb up a roof, ensure that the ladder top is at least one meter higher than the roof, as shown in Figure 1-6.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


1-15



Figure 1-6 Ladder top being one meter higher than the roof

1.8 Mechanical Safety This topic describes safety precautions for drilling holes, handling sharp objects, operating fans, and carrying heavy objects.

Drilling Holes

WARNING Do not drill holes on the cabinet without prior permission. Drilling holes without complying with the requirements affects the electromagnetic shielding performance of the cabinet and damages the cables inside the cabinet. In addition, if the scraps caused by drilling enter the cabinet, the printed circuit boards (PCBs) may be short-circuited. l

Before drilling a hole on the cabinet, remove the cables inside the cabinet.

l

Wear an eye protector when drilling holes. This is to prevent eyes from being injured by the splashing metal scraps.

l

Wear protection gloves when drilling holes.

l

Take measures to prevent the metallic scraps from falling into the cabinet. After the drilling, clean up the metallic scraps.

Sharp Objects

WARNING Wear protection gloves when carrying the device. This is to prevent hands from being injured by the sharp edges of the device.

1-16


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



Fans l

When replacing parts, place the objects such as the parts, screws, and tools properly. This is to prevent them from falling into the operating fans, which damages the fans or device.

l

When replacing the parts near fans, keep your fingers or boards from touching operating fans before the fans are powered off and stop running. Otherwise, the hands or the boards are damaged.

Carrying Heavy Objects Wear protection gloves when carrying heavy objects. This is to prevent hands from being hurt.

WARNING l The carrier must be prepared for load bearing before carrying heavy objects. This is to prevent the carrier from being strained or pressed by the heavy objects. l When you pull a chassis out of the cabinet, pay attention to the unstable or heavy objects on the cabinet. This is to prevent the heavy objects on the cabinet top from falling down, which may hurt you. l

Generally, two persons are needed to carry a chassis. It is prohibited that only one person carries a heavy chassis. When carrying a chassis, the carriers should stretch their backs and move stably to avoid being strained.

l

When moving or lifting a chassis, hold the handles or bottom of the chassis. Do not hold the handles of the modules installed in the chassis, such as the power modules, fan modules, and boards.

1.9 Other Precautions This topic describes safety precautions for removing and inserting boards, binding signal cables, and routing cables.

Removing and Inserting a Board

CAUTION When inserting a board, wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and handle the board gently to avoid distorting pins on the backplane. l

Slide the board along the guide rails.

l

Do not contact one board with another to avoid short-circuits or damage.

l

When holding a board in hand, do not touch the board circuits, components, connectors, or connection slots of the board to prevent damage caused by ESD of the human body to the electrostatic-sensitive components.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


1-17



Binding Signal Cables

CAUTION Bind the signal cables separately from the high-current or high-voltage cables.

Routing Cables In the case of extremely low temperature, heavy shock or vibration may damage the plastic skin of the cables. To ensure the construction safety, comply with the following requirements: l

When installing cables, ensure that the environment temperature is above 0°C.

l

If the cables are stored in a place where the ambient temperature is below 0°C, transfer them to a place at room temperature and store the cables for more than 24 hours before installation.

l

Handle the cables gently, especially in a low-temperature environment. Do not perform any improper operations, for example, pushing the cables down directly from a truck.

High Temperature

WARNING If the ambient temperature exceeds 55°C, the temperature of the front panel surface marked the flag may exceed 70°C. When touching the front panel of the board in such an environment, you must wear the protection gloves.

IF Cables

WARNING Before installing or removing an IF cable, you must turn off the power switch of the IF board.

1-18


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


2

2 Notices for High-Risk Operations

Notices for High-Risk Operations

About This Chapter This chapter provides notices for the operations that may cause bodily injury or equipment damage if they are not performed properly during the commissioning and maintenance of microwave equipment. 2.1 Operation Guide for the Toggle Lever Switch The ODU-PWR switch on the IF board is a toggle lever switch which must be turned on and off as per the following instructions to avoid damaging the IF board. 2.2 Operation Guide for the IF Jumper Before removing or installing an IF jumper, turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injury or damage to the IF board and ODU. 2.3 Operation Guide for the IF Cable Before removing or installing an IF cable, turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injury or damage to the IF board and ODU. 2.4 Operation Guide for the IF Board Before removing or installing an IF board, turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injury or damage to the IF board and ODU.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


2-1



2.1 Operation Guide for the Toggle Lever Switch The ODU-PWR switch on the IF board is a toggle lever switch which must be turned on and off as per the following instructions to avoid damaging the IF board.

Position and Description of the Toggle Lever Switch The toggle lever switch is located on the IF board and controls the power that is fed to the ODU, as shown in Figure 2-1. Figure 2-1 Toggle lever switch

O: OFF

I : ON

Turning On the Toggle Lever Switch 1.

2-2

Gently pull on the toggle lever switch out.


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


2.

Turn it to the left.

3.

Release the toggle lever switch.


Turning Off the Toggle Lever Switch 1.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)

Gently pull on the toggle lever switch.


2-3



2.

Turn it to the right.

3.

Release the toggle lever switch.

2.2 Operation Guide for the IF Jumper Before removing or installing an IF jumper, turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injury or damage to the IF board and ODU.

Procedure Step 1 Turn off the ODU-PWR switch on the IF board. For details, see 2.1 Operation Guide for the Toggle Lever Switch.

2-4


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


1


2

DANGER Ensure that the ODU is completely powered off before removing or installing the IF jumper. Step 2 Remove or install the IF jumper. ----End

2.3 Operation Guide for the IF Cable Before removing or installing an IF cable, turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injury or damage to the IF board and ODU.

Procedure Step 1 Turn off the ODU power switch on the IF board. For details, see 2.1 Operation Guide for the Toggle Lever Switch.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


2-5



2 1

DANGER Ensure that the ODU is completely powered off before removing or installing the IF cable. Step 2 Install or remove the IF cable. ----End

2.4 Operation Guide for the IF Board Before removing or installing an IF board, turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injury or damage to the IF board and ODU.

Procedure Step 1 Turn off the ODU-PWR switch on the IF board. For details, see 2.1 Operation Guide for the Toggle Lever Switch.

2-6


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


1


2

3

3

DANGER Ensure that the ODU is completely powered off before removing or installing the IF board. Step 2 Disconnect the IF jumper or IF cable. Step 3 Remove or install the IF board. ----End

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


2-7


3

3 Commissioning Preparations

Commissioning Preparations

About This Chapter This chapter describes the preparations that need to be made prior to commissioning equipment. 3.1 Preparing Documents and Tools This section lists the document and tools that should be prepared prior to commissioning the equipment. 3.2 Determining the Commissioning Method By using the U2000 for commissioning, engineers can adopt the network commissioning method. 3.3 Checking Commissioning Conditions Ensure that the equipment meets the commissioning requirements for the site or system prior to performing such tasks. The following sections provide a non-exhaustive checklist for both scenarios.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


3-1



3.1 Preparing Documents and Tools This section lists the document and tools that should be prepared prior to commissioning the equipment.

Documents The following document should be available before commissioning the equipment: l

Engineering design documents, including: – Network plan – Engineering design

l

Commissioning guides, such as the OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Tools Table 3-1 lists the tools required for the commissioning task. Table 3-1 Tools and meters Tool and Meter

Application Scenario

l Adjustable wrench

Aligning antennas

l Screwdriver l Telescope l Interphone l Hex key l Multimeter that has a test cable with a BNC connector at one end l North-stabilized indicator Laptop on which the Web LCT is installed

l Configuring site commissioning data by using the Web LCT l Querying the DCN status l Testing the AM switching

Network cable tester

Testing connectivity of network cables

l Optical power meter

Checking connectivity of optical fibers

l Short fiber jumper PC on which the U2000 is installed

Commissioning system items

NOTE

For details about the requirements and methods for installing the Web LCT, see the iManager U2000 Web LCT User Guide.

3-2


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



3.2 Determining the Commissioning Method By using the U2000 for commissioning, engineers can adopt the network commissioning method. NOTE

In the following instructions for both types of commissioning methods, site commissioning and system commissioning are defined as follows: l Site commissioning refers to commissioning that is performed on a hop and sites at both ends of the radio link by connecting the commissioning tool to the NE at a single site. l System commissioning refers to commissioning that is performed on all the NEs in the network by connecting the commissioning tool to a gateway NE where it configures the commissioning data for each site.

Single-hop Commissioning The single-hop commissioning method is preferred for small-scale microwave transmission networks (for example, a network with only one or two radio link hops). By performing singlehop commissioning, you can complete all site and system commissioning items at a time. The major commissioning steps are as follows: 1.

On both ends of a radio link, power on the NEs.

2.

Use the Web LCT to configure all service data on the NEs.

3.

Use the Web LCT to complete the site commissioning items.

4.

Use the Web LCT to complete the system commissioning items. NOTE

The Web LCT is used for single-hop commissioning, and therefore this document does not detail how to use the Web LCT. For details about how to use the Web LCT, see the commissioning guide in the documentation package of the Web LCT version.

Network Commissioning The network commissioning method is usually used for large-scale microwave transmission networks. The major commissioning steps are as follows: 1.

On both ends of a radio link, power on the NEs.

2.

Configure site commissioning data by using the Web LCT.

3.

Use the U2000 to complete the site commissioning items at sites where services converge.

4.

Use the U2000 to complete the system commissioning items at sites where services converge.

3.3 Checking Commissioning Conditions Ensure that the equipment meets the commissioning requirements for the site or system prior to performing such tasks. The following sections provide a non-exhaustive checklist for both scenarios. 3.3.1 Site Commissioning Ensure that the equipment and weather meet the requirements for site commissioning. Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


3-3



3.3.2 System Commissioning Ensure that the equipment and weather meet the requirements for system commissioning.

3.3.1 Site Commissioning Ensure that the equipment and weather meet the requirements for site commissioning. Details about these requirements are as follows: l

Hardware installation has been completed and has passed the installation check.

l

Power is available to the equipment.

l

The service signal cables that are connected to other equipment have been properly routed.

l

The appropriate risk control measures to arrest falling objects and ensure personnel safety are in place. Engineers are certified to commission the antennas.

l

There is no adverse weather (such as wind, rain, snow, or fog) that could hinder or impact the commissioning.

3.3.2 System Commissioning Ensure that the equipment and weather meet the requirements for system commissioning. Details about these requirements are as follows:

3-4

l

Site commissioning at both ends of a radio link has been completed.

l

There is no adverse weather (such as wind, rain, snow, or fog) that could hinder or impact the commissioning.


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


4

4 Commissioning Process

Commissioning Process

About This Chapter Based on the objects to be commissioned, the process can be divided into two stages: site commissioning and system commissioning. 4.1 Site Commissioning Process Site commissioning refers to commissioning that is performed on a hop and sites at both ends of a radio link. Site commissioning ensures that the sites and the radio link between the sites work properly, and is also performed in preparation of system commissioning. 4.2 System Commissioning Process System commissioning refers to commissioning for the entire microwave transmission network. System commissioning ensures that various services are transmitted properly and protection functions are implemented over the microwave transmission network.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


4-1



4.1 Site Commissioning Process Site commissioning refers to commissioning that is performed on a hop and sites at both ends of a radio link. Site commissioning ensures that the sites and the radio link between the sites work properly, and is also performed in preparation of system commissioning. You can use the following method to configure site commissioning data for the OptiX RTN 950 on site: l

Web LCT

Site Commissioning Items (Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using the Web LCT) Commissioning engineers can configure site commissioning data by using the Web LCT on site when they are: l

Familiar with how to configure radio link data on the OptiX RTN 950.

l

Aware of the radio link data plan for the site.

l

Equipped with a laptop on which the Web LCT is installed.

Table 4-1 Configuring site commissioning data by using the Web LCT Commissioning Item

Remarks

Powering On the Equipment

Required

Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using the Web LCT

Required

Aligning Antennasa

Aligning Single-Polarized Antennas

Required when microwave services are transmitted by single-polarized antennas

Aligning Dual-Polarized Antennas

Required when microwave services are transmitted by dual-polarized antennas

Querying the Status of Radio Links

Required

Querying the DCN Status

Required

NOTE

a: Before aligning antennas, power on the equipment and configure site commissioning data on both ends of the radio link.

4.2 System Commissioning Process System commissioning refers to commissioning for the entire microwave transmission network. System commissioning ensures that various services are transmitted properly and protection functions are implemented over the microwave transmission network. 4-2


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



Table 4-2 System commissioning process Commissioning Item

Remarks

Configuring Network-wide Service Data

Required

Testing Ethernet Services

Required when Ethernet services are available

Testing AM Switching

Required when the AM function is enabled

Testing Protection Switching

Testing IF 1+1 Switching

Required when the radio links are configured with 1+1 HSB/FD/SD

Testing ERPS Protection Switching

Required when ERPS protection is configured

Checking the Clock Status

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)

Required


4-3


5 Site Commissioning

5

Site Commissioning

About This Chapter Site commissioning includes the specific commissioning processes for all site commissioning items. 5.1 Powering On the Equipment By checking the power-on process of equipment, you can verify whether the hardware system of the equipment and the power system are functioning properly. 5.2 Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using the Web LCT This topic describes how to configure site commissioning data when using the Web LCT to perform site commissioning. 5.3 Testing Connectivity of Cables During the installation of the OptiX RTN 900, the cables may be connected to service interfaces incorrectly, or the hardware may malfunction. To ensure that the services run properly, test connectivity of the cables. 5.4 Aligning the Antennas Aligning the antennas is the most important activity in HOP commissioning. The alignment has a direct effect on the performance of the radio links. 5.5 Checking the Status of Radio Links After aligning the antennas, query the status of radio links and determine whether the radio links are in the normal state. 5.6 Querying the DCN Status The NMS manages NEs through DCN channels. By querying the radio links using the HOP management function, you can determine whether the DCN of the radio links runs properly.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


5-1



5.1 Powering On the Equipment By checking the power-on process of equipment, you can verify whether the hardware system of the equipment and the power system are functioning properly.

Prerequisite l

Hardware installation has been completed and has passed the installation check.

l

The power system is available. The voltage, pole connection, and fuse current of the power system have been checked in the process of connecting power cables.

l

The power supply (for example, the power box of the cabinet) has been turned off.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials None.

Context l

For the OptiX RTN 950, the recommended fuse currents are listed in Table 5-1. Table 5-1 Fuse currents

l

Chassis

Fuse Current

OptiX RTN 950

≥ 20 A

The OptiX RTN 950 supports the following system control, switching, and timing board: Chassis

Board Type

OptiX RTN 950

CSH

Precautions

CAUTION l If the equipment is configured with two PIU boards, the nominal voltage for the input power of each PIU board must be the same. l The ODU-PWR switch on the front panel of the IF board is designed with a locking device. Hence, you must pull out the switches lightly before you turn it. If the switch points to "O", the switch is turned off. If the switch points to "I", the switch is turned on. l If the output voltage of the power supply does not meet test requirements, do not power on the cabinet. First, reconstruct the power supply and then test the output voltage again.

5-2


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



Procedure Step 1 Verify that the power cables of the chassis are correctly connected. Then, power on the equipment and check the status of the indicators. In normal conditions, the PIU and FAN indicators are steady green, as shown in Figure 5-1. Table 5-2 provides the descriptions for the different states of the indicators. Table 5-2 Status of indicators Indicator

State

Description

PWR

Steady green

Indicates that the power supply is in the normal state.

Off

Indicates a power failure.

Steady green

Indicates that the fan is running properly.

Steady red

Indicates that the fan is faulty.

Off

Indicates that the fan is powered off.

FAN

Figure 5-1 Normal state PIU indicator

FAN indicator

Step 2 Check the status of the indicators on the system control, switching, and timing board and ensure that the equipment is powered on. The board indicators should conform to the following states and sequences. 1.

The PROG indicator should be green, off, green. The process lasts about 1 minute if service data is not configured. NOTE

This process lasts longer if service data is configured.

2. Issue 02 (2011-05-20)

The STAT and SYNC indicators should be green. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-3



STAT PROG SYNC ACTX ACTC

Figure 5-2 Normal state

NOTE

l For detailed meanings of the indicators, see the IDU hardware description. l For a board other than the system control, switching, and timing board on the IDU, the STAT indicator is on only after the corresponding logical board is added.

Step 3 Turn the ODU-PWR switch on the IF board to "I". NOTE

l The ODU indicator on an IF board is green only after the logical board of the IF board connected to the ODU and the logical board of the ODU are created. l In the event of indicator abnormalities, contact Huawei technical support.

----End

5.2 Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using the Web LCT This topic describes how to configure site commissioning data when using the Web LCT to perform site commissioning.

5-4


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



Configuration Process Figure 5-3 describes the process of configuring site commissioning data.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


5-5



Figure 5-3 Configuration flowchart Start

Connecting the Web LCT to the IDU

Creating NEs

Logging in to an NE

Changing NE IDs

Changing NE names

Setting NE communication parameters

Configuring logical boards

Procedure for configuring an IP radio link (XPIC enabled)

Synchronizing NE time

Procedure for configuring an IP radio link (XPIC disabled)

Creating an IF 1+1 protection group

Creating an XPIC group

Setting the AM attributes of the XPIC hybrid radio link

Configuring the IF/ODU information of a radio link

Creating an IF 1+1 protection group

Checking alarms

Configuring the IF/ODU information of a radio link

End

Checking alarms Mandatory

End

5-6

Optional


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



Procedure for Configuring NE Data Table 5-3 Procedure for configuring NE data Step

Action

Description

1

Connecting the Web LCT to the IDU

Mandatory.

2

Creating NEs by Using the Search Method

Mandatory. It is recommended that you create an NE in IP Auto Discovery mode.

3

Logging In to an NE

Mandatory. Enter correct values in User Name and Password. The default User Name is lct, and the default Password is password.

4

Changing the NE ID

Mandatory. Set parameters as follows: l Set ID according to the guideline specified in the DCN plan. l If a specific extended NE ID is required, change Extended ID.

5

Changing the NE Name

Optional.

6

Setting NE Communication Parameters

Mandatory if special requirements are imposed on the IP address of the NE. Set IP and Subnet Mask as required. NOTE If the IP address of an NE is not changed manually, the IP address changes to 0x81000000 + NE ID.

7

Configuring Logical Boards

Mandatory.

8

Synchronizing NE Time

Mandatory. This operation synchronizes NE time with the time on the computer that runs the Web LCT.

Procedure for Configuring an IP radio Link (XPIC Disabled) Table 5-4 Procedure for configuring an IP radio link (XPIC disabled)

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)

Step

Action

Description

1

8.3.1 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Groupa

Mandatory when radio links are configured with 1+1 protection. Set the parameters according to the network plan.


5-7



Step

Action

Description

2

8.3.5 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link

Mandatory. l Set IF Channel Bandwidth according to the network plan. l If the AM function is required, set AM Status to Disabled for commissioning. In addition, set Manually Specified Modulation Mode to Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity according to the network plan. l If the AM function is not required, set AM Status to Disabled. Set Manually Specified Modulation Mode to the modulation mode according to the network plan. l Set Link ID according to the network plan. l Set TX Frequency(MHz), T/R Spacing(MHz), and TX Power(dBm) according to the network plan. l Set TX Status to Unmute. l Set Power to Be Received(dBm) to the received signal level (RSL) specified in the network plan. The antenna misalignment indication function is enabled only after this parameter is set. When the antenna misalignment indication function is enabled, if the actual RSL of the ODU is 3 dB or more beyond the range of the preset receive power, the ODU indicator on the IF board connected to the ODU blinks yellow (on and off at intervals of 300 ms), indicating that the antennas are not aligned. After the antennas are aligned for 30 consecutive minutes, the NE automatically disables the antenna misalignment indication function.

3

Checking Alarms

Mandatory.

NOTE

For radio links configured with 1+1 HSB/SD protection, configure the IF and ODU information only for the main radio link. For radio links configured with 1+1 FD protection, configure the IF and ODU information for the main radio link and the ODU information for the standby radio link.

Procedure for Configuring an IP radio Link (XPIC Enabled) Table 5-5 Procedure for configuring an IP radio link (XPIC enabled)

5-8

Step

Action

Description

1

8.3.2 Creating an XPIC Workgroup

Mandatory. Set the parameters according to the network plan.


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



Step

Action

Description

2

8.3.4 Setting the AM Attributes of the XPIC Workgroup

Mandatory. Set parameters as follows: l If the AM function is enabled for the XPIC link, set AM Status to Disabled. In addition, set Manually Specified Modulation Mode to Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity according to the network plan. l If the AM function is disabled, set AM Status to Disabled. Set Manually Specified Modulation Mode to the modulation mode according to the network plan. l AM parameters must be the same in the horizontal and vertical polarization directions of the XPIC link.

3

4

8.3.1 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Group

Mandatory when two XPIC workgroups need to form two 1 +1 protection groups.


Mandatory. Configure the IF and ODU information in both horizontal and vertical polarization directions. Set parameters as follows:

Set the parameters according to the network plan. NOTE One XPIC workgroup cannot form a 1+1 protection group. The radio link in the horizontal/vertical polarization direction of the XPIC workgroup can form a 1+1 protection group with the radio link in the horizontal/vertical polarization direction of the other XPIC workgroup.

l Set Power to Be Received(dBm) to the RSL specified in the network plan. The antenna misalignment indication function is enabled only after this parameter is set. When the antenna misalignment indication function is enabled, if the actual RSL of the ODU is 3 dB or more beyond the preset receive power, the ODU indicator on the IF board connected to the ODU blinks yellow (300 ms on and 300 ms off), indicating that the antennas are not aligned. After the antennas are aligned for 30 consecutive minutes, the NE automatically disables the antenna misalignment indication function. l Power to Be Received(dBm) must be the same in the horizontal and vertical polarization directions.

Checking Alarms

5

Mandatory.

NOTE

For radio links configured with 1+1 HSB/SD protection, configure the IF and ODU information only of the main radio link. For radio links configured with 1+1 FD protection, configure the IF and ODU information for the main radio link and the ODU information for the standby radio link.

5.2.3 Logging In to an NE After an NE is created, you need to log in to the NE before managing the NE. 5.2.11 Creating an XPIC Workgroup Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


5-9



If you configure two XPIC radio links after binding the two radio links as an XPIC workgroup, the parameter settings including the channel bandwidth, transmit frequency, transmit power, and ATPC attribute are the same for the two radio links. 5.2.12 Setting the AM Attributes of the XPIC Workgroup After the XPIC Workgroup is created, you need to configure the AM attributes of the XPIC IP radio link according to the planned values.

5.2.1 Connecting the Web LCT to the IDU Connecting the Web LCT to the IDU properly is a prerequisite for future data configuration and for other commissioning items.

Prerequisite The equipment is powered on.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials Web LCT

Procedure Step 1 Start the laptop and log in to the operating system. Step 2 Set the IP address of the laptop. The IP address of the laptop should meet the following requirements: l The IP address of the laptop is in the same network segment (the default network segment is 129.9.0.0) as the NE, but their IP addresses are different. l The subnet mask for the IP address of the laptop is the same as that for the IP address of the NE (the default subnet mask is 255.255.0.0). l The default gateway IP address is blank. Step 3 Use a network cable to connect the Ethernet port of the laptop to the NMS/COM port on the system control, switching, and timing board.

NMS/COM

5-10


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



CAUTION Ensure that the network cable is properly connected to the Ethernet port of the laptop and the NMS/COM port on the system control, switching, and timing board. Otherwise, the equipment or test tool may be damaged. NOTE

The NMS/COM port on the system control, switching, and timing board supports the auto-MDI/MDI-X mode. Therefore, straight-through cables and crossover cables can both be used to set up a connection.

At this point, the indicators at the Ethernet port and the NMS/COM port are on (green). A message will be displayed indicating that the network has established a local connection if the operating system has been configured to do so. If the operating system displays a message indicating an IP address conflict, change the IP address. Step 4 Optional: Set the Internet Explorer as the default browser. Step 5 Optional: Set the security level of the Internet Explorer to medium or lower. Step 6 Optional: Disable the Pop-up Blocker. NOTE

If plug-ins that can block pop-up windows are also installed, disable their blocking function.

Step 7 Optional: Set the options of the Internet Explorer. 1.

Run the Internet Explorer.

2.

Choose Tool > Internet Options from the main menu of the Internet Explorer.

3.

On the General tab, click Settings in the Temporary Internet files area.

4.

In Check for newer versions of stored pages, click Every visit to the page, and then click OK.

5.

After being returned to the General tab, click OK.

Step 8 On the desktop, double-click the Start Web LCT icon. The system displays the USER LOGIN window of the Web LCT.

Step 9 Enter the values of User Name and Password, and then click Login. Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


5-11



l User Name: admin l Password: admin If the entered user name and the password are both correct, the NE List page is displayed in the Internet Explorer.

----End

Follow-up Procedure If logins to the USER LOGIN window or the NE List page fail, perform Step 4 through Step 7 again.

5.2.2 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method The search method is generally used to create an NE during site commissioning. It is recommended that you select the IP Auto Discovery mode.

Prerequisite l

The communication between the NMS and the NE is in the normal state.

l

The NE user has the authority of Operation Level or higher.


Procedure Step 1 In NE List, click NE Search. The Search NE dialog box is displayed. Step 2 Select the IP Auto Discovery mode.

NOTE

In the IP Auto Discovery mode, the Web LCT searches for the gateway NE and non-gateway NEs that are managed by the gateway NE in the network segment where the server resides.

Step 3 Click Search. Step 4 After the Web LCT finds the NEs to be managed, click End Search. 5-12


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



Step 5 Select the NE that needs to be added and click Add NE. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the NE is added successfully. Step 6 Click OK. A new NE has been added to the NE list.

Step 7 Click Cancel. ----End

5.2.3 Logging In to an NE After an NE is created, you need to log in to the NE before managing the NE.

Prerequisite l

You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

l

The NE to be managed is already created in NE List.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials U2000

Procedure Step 1 In the NE List, select the target NE and click NE Login. TIP

You can select multiple NEs at one time.

The NE Login dialog box is displayed. Step 2 Enter User Name and Password. Then, click OK.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


5-13



NOTE

l The default User Name is lct. l The default Password for user lct is password.

Login Status of the NE in the NE List changes to Logged In. Alarm Status of the NE is changed from Unknown to the current alarm status of the NE. Step 3 Click NE Explorer. The NE Explorer is displayed. TIP

To quickly start the NE Explorer, double-click the NE to be managed in the NE list. TIP

l Check the legend to learn the specific meanings of different colors and symbols in the slot layout diagram. l Click

to collapse/expand the legend.

----End

5.2.4 Changing the NE ID Modify the NE ID according to the engineering plan and ensure that each NE ID is unique. Modifying the NE ID does not interrupt services.

Prerequisite The NE user has the authority of Operation Level or higher.


5-14


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > NE Attribute from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Modify NE ID. The Modify NE ID dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Specify New ID and New Extended ID.

Step 4 Click OK. Click OK in the displayed confirmation dialog box. ----End

5.2.5 Changing the NE Name For ease of identification in the Main Topology, name the NE according to the NE's geographical location or the device connected to the NE.

Prerequisite The NE user has the authority of Operation Level or higher.


Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > NE Attribute from the Function Tree. Step 2 Enter the name of the NE in the Name field. NOTE

The name of an NE cannot contain any spaces or Chinese characters.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


5-15



Step 3 Click Apply. ----End

5.2.6 Setting NE Communication Parameters If special requirements are imposed on the IP address, change the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway NE of the NE.

Prerequisite The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.


Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > Communication Parameters from the Function Tree. Step 2 Configure the communication parameters of the NE. Step 3 Click Apply. NOTE

l If configuring multiple parameters, click Apply for each instance. l If the new IP address in the IP field is not in the original network segment, reset the IP address of the Web LCT and ensure that it is in the same segment as the new IP address of the NE. Otherwise, the NE is unreachable to the Web LCT.

5-16


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



----End

5.2.7 Configuring Logical Boards Add the logical board in the slot layout if it has not already been added. If the physical board is inconsistent with the logical board in the slot layout, delete the inconsistent logical board and add the correct logical board.

Prerequisite l


l

All the boards are installed correctly.

l

The ODU-PWR switch on the IF board is turned on and the communication between the IDU and the ODU is normal.


Procedure Step 1 Click the Slot Layout tab and click Add Physical Boards. Based on the slot layout, the NE automatically configures the logical boards that are required but are not yet configured for certain physical boards. Step 2 Optional: On the slot to which the board is to be added, right-click and select Add XXX. "XXX" is the name of the board to be added. Step 3 Optional: On the slot to which the board is to be deleted, right-click and select Delete. NOTE

Before deleting the board, delete the data, such as the service, clock, and protection, on the board.

----End Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


5-17



5.2.8 Synchronizing NE Time Adjust the NE time so that the NE time is synchronized with the time on the NMS. In this manner, the NMS can accurately record the time when an alarm, a performance event, or an abnormal event occurred.

Prerequisite l

The basic data of NEs on the entire network has been configured.

l

Time settings on the Web LCT are correct.

l

You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.


Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from the Function Tree. Step 2 Right-click the NE whose time needs to be synchronized and choose Synchronize with NM Time from the shortcut menu.

----End

5.2.9 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Group If the radio link adopts 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection, you need to create the corresponding IF 1 +1 protection group.

Prerequisite l

The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

l

The IF boards and the ODUs to which the IF boards are connected must be added on the Slot Layout.

l

The IF boards of an IF 1+1 FD/SD protection group must be configured in the paired slots.


5-18


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



Background Information When a 1+0 service is converted into 1+1 HSB protection by configuring an IF 1+1 protection group, the original service is not interrupted. The board where the original service exists, however, needs to be set to the working board.

Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the IF 1+1 Protection tab. Step 3 Click New. The Create IF 1+1 Protection dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Configure the parameters of the IF 1+1 protection group.

NOTE

It is recommended to set the parameters for the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection as follows: l Set Working Mode according to the network plan. l Set Revertive Mode to Revertive. l Set WTR Time(s) to the default value. l Set Enable Reverse Switching according to the network plan. When Working Mode is HSB, set Enable Reverse Switching to Disabled; when Working Mode is SD, set Enable Reverse Switching to Enabled; when Working Mode is FD, Enable Reverse Switching is invalid.

Step 5 Click OK. ----End

5.2.10 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link By performing this operation, you can configure the IF/ODU information for a radio link.

Prerequisite l


l

The IF boards and the ODUs to which the IF boards are connected must be added on the Slot Layout.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials Web LCT Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


5-19



Precautions l

In 1+1 HSB/SD protection mode, one protection group corresponds to one radio link. In this case, configure only the IF/ODU information of the main device.

l

In 1+1 FD protection mode, one protection group corresponds to one radio link. In this case, configure the IF/ODU information of the active device and the ODU information of the standby device.

l

In the case of one XPIC radio link, one XPIC workgroup corresponds to two radio links. The IF/ODU information of the two radio links in different polarization directions should be separately configured.

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab. Step 3 Click an IF board icon or ODU icon. The system displays the IF/ODU information of the radio link to which the IF board or ODU to which the IF board is connected belongs. Step 4 Configure the corresponding IF information of the radio link.

5-20


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



NOTE

The recommended settings for the parameters are as follows: l Set Link ID and IF Channel Bandwidth according to the network plan. l Set AM Enable Status to Disabled and set this parameter according to the network plan after per-NE commissioning. l After setting AM Enable Status to Disabled, set Manually Specified Modulation Mode to Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity that is originally planned.

Step 5 Configure the corresponding ODU information of the radio link.

NOTE

The recommended settings for the parameters are as follows: l Set TX Frequency(MHz) and T/R Spacing(MHz) according to the network plan. l Set TX Power(dBm) according to the network plan. The value of this parameter should not be higher than the rated maximum transmit power of the ODU. l Set TX Status to Unmute. l Set Power to Be Received(dBm) according to the network plan. The antenna misalignment indication function is enabled only after this parameter is set.


5.2.11 Creating an XPIC Workgroup If you configure two XPIC radio links after binding the two radio links as an XPIC workgroup, the parameter settings including the channel bandwidth, transmit frequency, transmit power, and ATPC attribute are the same for the two radio links.

Prerequisite l


l

The corresponding XPIC IF boards and the ODUs connected to the XPIC IF boards are added to the NE Panel.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials Web LCT Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


5-21



Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the XPIC tab. Step 3 Click New. The Create XPIC Working Group dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Configure the parameters for the XPIC protection group.

NOTE

The recommended settings for the parameters are as follows: l Set IF Channel Bandwidth, Polarization direction-V, Polarization direction-H, Link ID-V, Link IDH, Transmit Power(dBm), Maximum Transmit Power(dBm), Transmission Frequency(MHz), and T/ R Spacing(MHz) according to the network plan. l Set Transmission Status to Unmute. l Set ATPC Status to Disabled and set this parameter according to the network plan after per-NE commissioning. l Set ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) and ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm) according to the network plan. It is recommended you set ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) to the value that is 10 dB higher than the planned central value of the upper and lower thresholds, and ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm) to the value that is 10 dB lower than the planned central value of the upper and lower thresholds. l Set ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status according to the network plan. If this parameter is set to Enabled, the equipment automatically uses the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds according to the work mode of the radio link.

Step 5 Click OK. ----End 5-22


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



5.2.12 Setting the AM Attributes of the XPIC Workgroup After the XPIC Workgroup is created, you need to configure the AM attributes of the XPIC IP radio link according to the planned values.

Prerequisite l


l

The XPIC protection group has been created.


Background Information The XPIC IF board ISX2 supports IP radio, and the AM attributes can be configured.

Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the XPIC tab. Step 3 Click the Hybrid/AM Configuration tab. Step 4 Configure the AM attributes of the XPIC radio link.

NOTE

The recommended settings for the parameters are as follows: l If the AM function is enabled for the XPIC link, set AM Status to Disabled and Manually Specified Modulation Mode to Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity as planned during site commissioning. l If the AM function is disabled, set AM Status to Disabled and Manually Specified Modulation Mode to the planned modulation mode. l AM parameters must be the same in the horizontal and vertical polarization directions of the XPIC link.


5.2.13 Checking Alarms By checking the alarms generated by the equipment, you can determine whether the equipment is working properly. Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


5-23



Prerequisite l

The equipment is connected to the Web LCT.

l

Data configuration is complete.


Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE from the Object Tree, and then click

on the toolbar.

Step 2 Click the Browse Current Alarms tab. Step 3 Check the displayed alarm information. Check whether there are any equipment alarms, the following alarms in particular: l POWER_ALM l FAN_FAIL l HARD_BAD l BD_STATUS l SYNC_C_LOS l CONFIG_NOSUPPORT l NESF_LOST l TEMP_ALARM l IF_CABLE_OPEN l XPIC_LOS For details about the preceding alarms and about how to handle them, refer to the OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide. ----End

5.3 Testing Connectivity of Cables During the installation of the OptiX RTN 900, the cables may be connected to service interfaces incorrectly, or the hardware may malfunction. To ensure that the services run properly, test connectivity of the cables. 5.3.1 Testing Connectivity of Network Cables By testing connectivity of network cables, you can determine whether the network cables are in the normal state. 5.3.2 Checking Fiber Jumper Connection During installation, the fiber jumpers may be incorrectly connected or the attenuation may be excessively high. As a result, services will fail to run properly. To prevent this situation, check the connection after the fiber jumper is routed from the optical interface to the optical distribution frame (ODF). 5-24


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



5.3.1 Testing Connectivity of Network Cables By testing connectivity of network cables, you can determine whether the network cables are in the normal state.

Prerequisite The network cables are already made.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials Network cable tester

Background Information You can also test the connectivity of a network cable by performing a loopback on the data ports (this method is applicable when the equipment is powered on). Specifically, use the network cable to be tested to connect any two data ports. If the LINK indicators of the two data ports turn on, it indicates that the network cable is in the normal state.

Procedure Step 1 Connect the network cable to the port of the network cable tester. Figure 5-4 Testing the Ethernet service cable

Step 2 Check the indicator of the network cable tester. Network Cable

End A

End B

Straight-through cable The 1-8-G indicators turn on one after another.

The 1-8-G indicators turn on one after another.

Crossover cable

The 3-6-1-4-5-2-7-8-G indicators turn on one after another.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)

The 1-8-G indicators turn on one after another.


5-25



Step 3 Connect the network cable that passes the test to the Ethernet port of the device. ----End

5.3.2 Checking Fiber Jumper Connection During installation, the fiber jumpers may be incorrectly connected or the attenuation may be excessively high. As a result, services will fail to run properly. To prevent this situation, check the connection after the fiber jumper is routed from the optical interface to the optical distribution frame (ODF).

Prerequisite l

The fiber jumper is installed and routed from the optical interface to the ODF.

l

The equipment is powered on.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials l

Optical power meter

l

Short fiber jumper

Precautions

DANGER When you are checking the connection of fiber jumpers, avoid direct eye exposure to the laser beams.

Connection Diagram When you use an SFP optical module to test the fiber jumper connection, connect the fiber jumper to the optical power meter on the ODF side and connect the fiber jumper to the TX port of the SFP optical module on the chassis side. Figure 5-5 shows the connection.

5-26


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



Figure 5-5 Connection diagram for checking the fiber connection by using an SFP optical module

External Cable

TX

RX

ODF

Fiber jumper connected to the TX port

Procedure Step 1 On the chassis side, disconnect the fiber jumper from the TX port of the SFP optical module. Step 2 Connect the optical power meter to the TX port of the SFP optical module with a short fiber jumper. Step 3 Switch on the optical power meter and set the operating wavelength according to the type of optical interface. The measured launched optical power of the SFP optical module is A. Step 4 Insert the fiber jumper back into the TX port. Step 5 On the ODF side, disconnect the fiber jumper from the TX port. Connect the fiber jumper to the optical power meter. The measured optical power is B. Step 6 Disconnect the fiber jumper from the TX port of the SFP optical module. The optical power meter reads "LO" and does not receive any optical signals. Step 7 Compare the values of A and B. l If the difference between A and B is less than 1 dB, it indicates that the fiber jumper is correctly connected and the attenuation of the fiber jumper is within the normal range. l If the difference between A and B is more than 1 dB, verify that the fiber jumper is in good condition and is correctly routed. Then, verify that the fiber jumper terminal is clean.

CAUTION If the fiber jumper is connected through a flange, the difference between A and B should be less than 2 dB. Otherwise, it indicates that the fiber jumper is incorrectly connected or the attenuation of the fiber jumper is not within the normal range. Verify that the fiber jumper is in good condition and is correctly routed. Then, Verify that the fiber jumper terminal is clean.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


5-27



Step 8 Repeat Steps 1 through 7 to check the fiber jumper that is connected to the RX port. Step 9 Restore the fiber jumper connections on the chassis side and the ODF side. Step 10 Repeat Steps 1 through 7 to check fiber jumper connections of other optical interfaces and then restore the connections when completed. ----End

5.4 Aligning the Antennas Aligning the antennas is the most important activity in HOP commissioning. The alignment has a direct effect on the performance of the radio links. 5.4.1 Main Lobe and Side Lobes Engineers performing an alignment on an antenna should be familiar with the related knowledge of the main lobe and side lobes 5.4.2 Aligning Single-Polarized Antennas When aligning single-polarized antennas, engineers need to align the main lobe by adjusting the azimuth and elevation of the antennas at both ends. 5.4.3 Aligning Dual-Polarized Antennas When aligning dual-polarized antennas, engineers need to align the main lobe by adjusting the azimuth and elevation of the antennas at both ends.

5.4.1 Main Lobe and Side Lobes Engineers performing an alignment on an antenna should be familiar with the related knowledge of the main lobe and side lobes

Definitions of the Main Lobe and Side Lobes The electric field strength of the radiated power of an antenna varies in space. The differences of the power distribution can be shown in an azimuth diagram. Generally, there are the horizontal azimuth diagram for the horizontal section and the vertical azimuth diagram for the vertical section. Figure 5-6 is a vertical azimuth diagram. There are many lobes in this figure. The lobe with the strongest radiated power is the main lobe. The other lobes are side lobes wherein the first side lobe can be used for aligning the antenna. Figure 5-6 Main lobe and side lobes

Main lobe First side lobe Second side lobe

5-28


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



Locating the Main Lobe Antenna alignment involves making the main lobe of the local antenna align with the main lobe of the opposite antenna. The purpose is to make the received signal strength of the opposite antenna reach the maximum value. The main lobe width of the microwave antenna is narrow, between 0.6° and 3.7°. For instance, in the case of a 1.2 m antenna at a working frequency of 23 GHz, the azimuth is only 0.9° when the signal level drops from the signal peak to zero. Once a signal is detected, very small alignment adjustments are required to locate the main lobe. Antenna movement across the main lobe results in a rapid rise and fall in the signal level. Whether the main lobe is aligned properly can be verified by comparing the received signal peaks. Typically, the main lobe signal peak is 20-25 dB higher than the first side lobe signal peak. Figure 5-7 shows the head-on view of a free-space model for radio propagation with concentric rings of side lobe peaks and troughs radiating outward from the main lobe. Figure 5-7 Horizontal section and front view of the antenna 180o

90o

0o

Center of the main lobe Outer edge of the main lobe, 310 dB lower than the main lobe

180o

Trough between the main lobe and the first side lobe, 30 dB lower than the main lobe First side lobe, 20-25 dB lower than the main lobe

90o

Trough between the first side lobe and the second side lobe, 30 dB or more lower than the main lobe

0o a Horizontal section of the antenna

b Head-on view

Second side lobe, where signals are very weak

Tracking Path Side lobe signal readings are sometimes mistaken for main lobe readings when signals are tracked on different elevation (or azimuth). Figure 5-8 shows a horizontal radio propagation model of the antenna, and signal levels at three different elevation positions (1-7 represent the measured signal level values of the received signal strength indicator (RSSI) port of the ODU).

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


5-29



Figure 5-8 Three tracking paths Head-on view of tracking paths for different elevations

Signal levels for each path 6 7

B A

7

6

C

C'

5

4 1

2

C 4

B' 3

C'

5 B'

B

A'

2 1 A

3 A'

l

Line AA' indicates that the main lobe of the antenna is almost aligned properly. The main lobe is at point 2, and the first side lobes are at points 1 and 3. Slightly adjust the azimuth of the antenna at point 2 until the peak signal appears.

l

Line BB' indicates that the elevation of the antenna slightly deviates from the main lobe. The signal peaks appear at points 4 and 5. The signal peak at point 4 is higher than the signal peak at point 5 because of the antenna characteristics. As a result, point 4 may be mistaken for the peak point of the main lobe signal. The correct method is to set the azimuth of the antenna to the middle position between the two signal peaks. Then, adjust the elevation of the antenna until the three signal peaks of line AA' appear. Slightly adjust the elevation and azimuth of the antenna at point 2 until the peak signal appears.

l

Line CC' indicates that the elevation of the antenna completely deviates from the main lobe and is almost aligned with the first side lobe. The signal peak of the first side lobe at point 6 and the signal peak of the first side lobe at point 7 appear as one signal peak. As a result, points 6 and 7 may be mistaken for the peak point of the main lobe signal. The correct method is to set the azimuth of the antenna to the middle of points 6 and 7. Then, adjust the elevation of the antenna until the three signal peaks of line AA' appear. Slightly adjust the elevation and azimuth of the antenna at point 2 until the peak signal appears.

When the side lobe peak at one side is higher than the side lobe peak at the other side, as shown in Figure 5-9, a common error is moving the antenna left to right along line DD', or top to bottom along line EE'. As a result, point 1 may be mistaken for the peak point of the main lobe signal. The correct method is to adjust the elevation in the middle of points 1 and 2 or the azimuth in the middle of points 1 and 3. Several adjustments are required so that the three signal peaks of line AA' can appear. Slightly adjust the elevation and azimuth of the antenna at point 2 as shown in Figure 5-8 until the peak signal appears.

5-30


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



Figure 5-9 Aligning the antenna with the first side lobe E 1

2

1

D

D'

D D' 1

3

2

3

E

E'

E'

5.4.2 Aligning Single-Polarized Antennas When aligning single-polarized antennas, engineers need to align the main lobe by adjusting the azimuth and elevation of the antennas at both ends.

Prerequisite l

The site commissioning of the radio equipment at both ends of the radio link is complete.

l

The weather at both stations is suitable for outdoor operations and there is no threat of rain, snow, or fog.

l

On-site conditions meet the requirements for the antennas to operate at a high altitude and the personnel commissioning the antennas are trained to work at high altitudes.

l

The Multimeter is calibrated.

l

The ATPC function is disabled (its default status on the NE is Disabled).

l

The AM function is disabled (its default status on the NE is Disabled).

Tools, Equipment, and Materials l

Adjustable wrench

l

Telescope

l

Interphone

l

Hex key

l

Multimeter (with a BNC connecter prepared at one end for future tests)

l

North-stabilized indicator

l

If the radio link is configured in 1+1 protection mode and one antenna is used at each end, power off the standby ODUs at both ends before aligning the antennas. After the antennas are aligned, power on the standby ODUs at both ends.

l

If the radio link is configured in 1+1 SD mode, align the antennas in the following sequence:

Precautions

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


5-31



l

1.

Power on the main ODUs at both ends. Ensure that they are powered on during the alignment.

2.

Power off the standby ODUs at both ends. Then, align the main antennas at both ends.

3.

Power on the standby ODU at the local end. Retain the position of the main antenna at the remote end, and adjust the diversity antenna at the local end.

4.

Power on the standby ODU at the remote end. Retain the position of the main antenna at the local end, and adjust the diversity antenna at the remote end.

If the radio link is configured in 1+1 FD mode and two antennas are used at each end, align the antenna in the following sequence: 1.

Power on the main ODUs, power off the standby ODUs, and align the main antennas at both ends.

2.

Power off the main ODUs, power on the standby ODUs, and align the diversity antennas at both ends.

CAUTION You can adjust the azimuth and elevation of the antennas by adjusting the appropriate nuts or screws. For details, see the installation guide for the antennas.

Procedure Step 1 Determine the azimuth of the antenna according to the installation position and height of the antenna. Then, adjust the elevation of the antenna to the horizontal position. Step 2 Connect a multimeter to the received signal strength indicator (RSSI) port on the ODU at the local end and test the voltage value VBNC. TIP

It is recommended that you make the test line terminated with a BNC connector at one end in advance, because it is more convenient for testing the voltage value VBNC.

5-32


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



Figure 5-10 Testing the RSSI voltage by using a multimeter

Step 3 Adjust the azimuth and elevation of the antenna as follows: 1.

Keep the remote antenna fixed.

2.

Use the multimeter to measure VBNC. At the local end, rotate the antenna widely in the horizontal direction. When you rotate the antenna, the tested signal peaks may be as follows: l Three signal peaks are tracked, for example, line AA' in Figure 5-8. In this case, adjust the azimuth of the antenna to the peak position at point 2 as shown in Figure 5-8. l Two signal peaks are tracked, for example, line BB' in Figure 5-8. In this case, adjust the azimuth of the antenna to the middle of points 4 and 5 as shown in Figure 5-8. Then, adjust the elevation of the antenna so that the three signal peaks in the case of line AA' can appear. Adjust the antenna to the peak position at point 2 as shown in Figure 5-8. l One signal peak is tracked, for example, line CC' in Figure 5-8. In this case, adjust the azimuth of the antenna to the middle of points 6 and 7 as shown in Figure 5-8. Then, adjust the elevation of the antenna so that the three signal peaks in the case of line AA' can appear. Adjust the antenna to the peak position at point 2 as shown in Figure 5-8.

3.

Slightly adjust the elevation and azimuth at point 2 as shown in Figure 5-8 until VBNC reaches the peak within the tracked range.

4.

Adjust the antenna until the VBNC voltage reaches the peak value. Then, fix the antenna at the local end. NOTE

When you tighten the antenna, ensure that the VBNC voltage remains at the peak value.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


5-33



Step 4 Repeat Step 2 to Step 3 to adjust the antenna at the remote end. When VBNC reaches the peak value, tighten the antenna at the remote end. Step 5 Repeat Step 2 to Step 4 two to four times. When VBNC at the local end and VBNC at the remote end reach the peak value, tighten the antennas at both ends Step 6 Use the multimeter to test VBNC at both ends. Obtain the current RSL by referring to the relationship curve between VBNC of ODUs and the RSLs at both ends. NOTE

The curve diagram for VBNC and RSL is delivered along with the ODU.

The actual RSL must be the same as the value planned by the network planning department. NOTE

l If VBNC does not meet the requirements, see the OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide for suggestion on how to handle the issue.

Step 7 Observe the ODU indicator on the IF board. The ODU indicator should turn off. If the ODU indicator blinks yellow, align the antennas. Step 8 Tighten all the screws on the antennas. NOTE

Use the multimeter to measure the received value of RSSI again to ensure that no fault occurred in the process of tightening the screws.

----End

5.4.3 Aligning Dual-Polarized Antennas When aligning dual-polarized antennas, engineers need to align the main lobe by adjusting the azimuth and elevation of the antennas at both ends.

Prerequisite l

The site commissioning of the radio equipment at both ends of the radio link is complete.

l

The weather at both stations is suitable for outdoor operations and there is no threat of rain, snow, or fog

l

On-site conditions meet the requirements for the antennas to operate at a high altitude and the personnel commissioning the antennas are trained to work at high altitudes.

l

The Multimeter is calibrated.

l

The ATPC function is disabled (its default status on the NE is Disabled).

l

The AM function is disabled (its default status on the NE is Disabled).

Tools, Equipment, and Materials

5-34

l

Adjustable wrench

l

Telescope

l

Interphone

l

Hex key

l

Multimeter (with a BNC connector prepared at one end for future tests)

l

North-stabilized indicator Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



Procedure Step 1 Check the installation modes of the ODUs at both ends of the radio link. If...

Then...

The ODUs are directly installed onto an OMT

Proceed to Step 2.

The ODUs are installed separately from the antenna

Proceed to Step 3 through Step 13.

Step 2 Perform the following to align the dual-polarized antennas. 1.

Power off the vertically polarized ODUs at both ends of the radio link, and power on the horizontally polarized ODUs at both ends of the radio link. Ensure that the antennas transmit horizontally polarized signals.

2.

Adjust the azimuth angle and elevation angle of the antennas at both ends by referring to 5.4.2 Aligning Single-Polarized Antennas, and ensure that the main lobe of the horizontally polarized signals is aligned with the antenna.

3.

Power on the vertically polarized ODUs at both ends of the radio link.

4.

Tighten all the screws on the antennas. NOTE


Step 3 Power off the vertically polarized ODUs at both ends of the radio link, and power on the horizontally polarized ODUs at both ends of the radio link. Ensure that the antennas transmit horizontally polarized signals. Step 4 Adjust the azimuth angle and elevation angle of the antennas at both ends by referring to 5.4.2 Aligning Single-Polarized Antennas, and ensure that the main lobe of the horizontally polarized signals is aligned with the antenna. Step 5 Measure the RSL (P1) of the horizontally polarized signals at the local end. 1.

Use a multimeter to measure the signal level on the RSSI port of the horizontally polarized ODU.

2.

Calculate the RSL (P1) of the horizontally polarized received signals by referring to the curve diagram delivered along with the ODU.

Step 6 Adjust the feed boom at the local end, and ensure that the RSL of the vertically polarized signals reaches the lower threshold (P2). 1.

Power on the vertically polarized ODU at the local end.

2.

Use a multimeter to measure the signal level on the RSSI port of the vertically polarized ODU.

3.

Calculate the RSL (P2) of the vertically polarized signals by referring to the curve diagram in the ODU box.

4.

Calculate the XPD1 (XPD1 = P1 - P2). If...

Then...

The calculated XPD1 (XPD1 = P1 - P2) is less than 30 dB

Proceed to the next step.

The calculated XPD1 (XPD1 = P1 - P2) is not less than 30 dB Perform Step 7. Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


5-35



5.

Release the holder of the feed boom to some extent, and turn the feed boom slightly until the signal level reaches the lower threshold. The calculated XPD1 (XPD1 = P1 - P2) should not be less than 30 dB.

Step 7 Record the angle (D1) of the current feed boom. Step 8 Power off the horizontally polarized ODUs at both ends of the radio link, and power on the vertically polarized ODUs at both ends of the radio link. Ensure that the antennas transmit vertically polarized signals. Step 9 Measure the RSL (P3) of the vertically polarized signals at the local end by referring to Step 5. Step 10 Adjust the feed boom at the local end, and ensure that the RSL of the vertically polarized signals reaches the lower threshold (P4). 1.

Power on the vertically polarized ODU at the local end.

2.

Use a multimeter to measure the signal level on the RSSI port of the vertically polarized ODU.

3.

Calculate the RSL (P4) of the vertically polarized signals by referring to the curve diagram delivered along with the ODU.

4.

Calculate the XPD2 (XPD2 = P3 - P4). If...

Then...

The calculated XPD2 (XPD2 = P3 - P4) is less than 30 dB


The calculated XPD2 (XPD2 = P3 - P4) is not less than 30 dB Perform Step 11. 5.

Release the holder of the feed boom to some extent, and turn the feed boom slightly until the signal level reaches the lower threshold. The calculated XPD2 (XPD2 = P3 - P4) should not be less than 30 dB.

Step 11 Record the angle (D2) of the current feed boom. Step 12 Adjust the feed boom slightly (ranging from D1 to D2), and ensure that XPD1 and XPD2 are not less than 30 dB. NOTE

If D1 and D2 are the same, you do not need to adjust the feed boom.

Step 13 Tighten all the screws on the antennas. NOTE


----End

Related Information In practice, you can align dual-polarized antennas by measuring only the vertically polarized signals.

5.5 Checking the Status of Radio Links After aligning the antennas, query the status of radio links and determine whether the radio links are in the normal state. 5-36


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



Prerequisite The antennas have been aligned.

Procedure Step 1 Observe the LINK indicator on the IF board.

1.

If the LINK indicator on the IF board is on (green), it indicates that the radio link is in the normal state.

2.

If the LINK indicator on the IF board is on (red), check whether the data configuration of the ODU is correct and whether the antennas are aligned.

----End

5.6 Querying the DCN Status The NMS manages NEs through DCN channels. By querying the radio links using the HOP management function, you can determine whether the DCN of the radio links runs properly.

Prerequisite l

The basic data of NEs on the entire network has been configured.

l

The antennas have been aligned.

l

You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


5-37




Procedure Step 1 Select an NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 In the IF/ODU Configuration tab, select and right-click the required IF board. Then, choose HOP Management from the shortcut menu.

l If a hop management window is displayed as shown in Figure 5-11, the DCN of the radio links runs properly. Figure 5-11 Hop management

l If the dialog box is displayed as Operation failed, check the data configurations. ----End

5-38


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


6

6 System Commissioning

System Commissioning

About This Chapter System commissioning includes the specific commissioning processes for all system commissioning items. 6.1 Configuring Networkwide Service Data After site commissioning is performed for each hop of the radio links, the ECC communication between NEs is normal. In this case, an NE can be accessed by using the U2000, and the networkwide service data can be configured. 6.2 Testing Ethernet Services By testing Ethernet services, you can check whether the Ethernet services are available over radio links. The Ethernet services can be tested by using the ETH-OAM function. Using this method, an Ethernet tester is not required. 6.3 Testing AM Switching If no BER tester is available, you can test AM switching by querying the bit errors over radio links. 6.4 Testing Protection Switching By testing protection switching, you can determine whether the protection switching is normal over radio links. 6.5 Checking the Clock Status Check the clock status for each NE to ensure that the clocks of all the NEs on a radio network are synchronized.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


6-1



6.1 Configuring Networkwide Service Data After site commissioning is performed for each hop of the radio links, the ECC communication between NEs is normal. In this case, an NE can be accessed by using the U2000, and the networkwide service data can be configured. NOTE

For detailed procedures of configuring networkwide service data, see 7 Configuring Networkwide Service Data.

6.2 Testing Ethernet Services By testing Ethernet services, you can check whether the Ethernet services are available over radio links. The Ethernet services can be tested by using the ETH-OAM function. Using this method, an Ethernet tester is not required.

Prerequisite Ethernet services have been configured. NOTE

It is recommended that you test low-priority Ethernet services in good weather conditions, where the AM function works in the highest-efficiency modulation mode.


Test Connection Diagram This section uses the point-to-point transparently transmitted Ethernet services between port 2 on NE 2 and port 1 on NE 1 as an example, as shown in Figure 6-1. Figure 6-1 Networking diagram for testing Ethernet services PORT 1

RNC

PORT 2

NE 1

NE 2

NodeB

Procedure Step 1 Configure the maintenance domains (MDs) of NE 1 and NE 2. 1.

6-2

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


2.


Choose New > New Maintenance Domain. The New Maintenance Domain dialog box is displayed.

3.

Configure the parameters of the new MDs. l Maintenance Domain Name: MD1 for NE 1 and NE 2 l Maintenance Domain Level: 4 for NE 1 and NE 2 NOTE

The MD names and the MD levels of the NEs must be the same.

4.

Click OK to close the displayed dialog box.

Step 2 Configure the maintenance associations (MAs) of NE 1 and NE 2. 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Select the maintenance domain in which a maintenance association needs to be created. Choose New > New Maintenance Association. The New Maintenance Association dialog box is displayed.

3.

Configure the parameters of the new MAs. l Maintenance Association Name: MA1 for NE 1 and NE 2 l Relevant Service: services from NE 1 to NE 2 NOTE

Click in Relevant Service, and select relevant services in the New Maintenance Association dialog box.

4.


Step 3 Configure the maintenance association end points (MEPs) of NE 1 and NE 2. 1.


2.

Click the Maintenance Association tab.

3.

Select the maintenance association in which an MEP needs to be created. Choose New > New MEP Point. The system displays the New MEP Point dialog box.

4. Issue 02 (2011-05-20)

Configure the parameters of the new MEPs. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-3



l MP ID: 101 for NE 1, and 102 for NE 2 l Direction: Ingress for NE 1 and NE 2 l CC Status: Active for NE 1 and NE 2

5.


Step 4 Configure the remote MEPs for the MAs of NE 1 and NE 2. 1.


2.

Click the Maintenance Association tab.

3.

Choose OAM > Manage Remote MEP Point. Then, the Manage Remote Maintenance Point dialog box is displayed.

4.

Click New. The Add Maintenance Association Remote Maintenance Point dialog box is displayed.

5.

Set the parameters of the new remote MEPs. l Remote Maintenance Point ID: 102 for NE 1, and 101 for NE 2 NOTE

Set the Remote Maintenance Point ID of NE 1 to the MP ID of NE 2, and set the Remote Maintenance Point ID of NE 2 to the MP ID of NE 1.

6.


Step 5 Test availability of the Ethernet services from NE 1 to NE 2. 1.

Select an NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE 1, and choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM.

2.

Select the MD, MA, and MEP that correspond to port 1, and click OAM.

3.

Select Start LB. The LB Test window is displayed.

4.

Select Destination Maintenance Point ID, and set the parameters in Test Node. l Source Maintenance Point ID: 101 (maintenance point ID of NE 1)

6-4


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



l Destination Maintenance Point ID: 102 (maintenance point ID of NE 2) l Transmitted Packet Count: 20 (recommended) l Transmitted Packet Length: 64 (recommended; the parameter can also be set to 128, 256, 512, 1024, or 1280 for testing the Ethernet services of different packet lengths.) NOTE

The maximum packet length is 1400.

l Transmitted Packet Priority: 7 (recommended)

5.

Click Start Test.

6.

Check Detection Result. The LossRate in the Detection Result should be 0.

----End

6.3 Testing AM Switching If no BER tester is available, you can test AM switching by querying the bit errors over radio links.

Prerequisite l


l

The radio links must be the IP radio links for which the AM function is enabled.

l

The weather is favorable.


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


6-5



Procedure Step 1 Configure the Hybrid/AM attribute on the local NE. 1.

Select the IF board from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the IF Attributes tab.

3.

On the local NE, set the AM attribute to Disable, and set Manually Modulation Mode to the same value as Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity.

4.

Click Apply.

Step 2 Query the 15-minute performance value of the IF board on the local NE. 1.

Select the desired IF board from the Object Tree in NE Explorer.

2.

In the Function Tree, choose Performance > Current Performance.

3.

In Monitored Object Filter Criteria, select All.

4.

Set Monitor Period to 15-Minute.

5.

In Count, select FEC Performance. In Display Options, select Display Zero Data and Display Continuous Severely Errored Seconds.

6.

Click Query, and then close the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. In performance events, the value of FEC_UNCOR_BLOCK_CNT should be 0. If the value is not 0, choose Reset on the performance register to clear the existing performance values.

Step 3 Query the AM working status on the local NE. 1.


2.


3.

Click Query. Transmit-End Modulation Mode should be Manually Modulation Mode of a pre-set value.

Step 4 Reset the performance event register. 1.

Select the desired IF board from the Object Tree in NE Explorer.

2.

In the Function Tree, choose Performance > Current Performance.

3.

Click Reset. The confirmation dialog box is displayed.

4.

Click Yes.

5.

Click Close.

Step 5 Configure the Hybrid/AM attribute to the planned values on the local NE. 6-6


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



1.


2.


3.

On the local NE, set the AM attribute to Enable, and set Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity and Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity to the planned values.

4.

Click Apply.

Step 6 Repeat Step 2. Wait for a period, and query the 15-minute performance value of the IF board on the local NE. In performance events, the value of FEC_UNCOR_BLOCK_CNT should be 0. Step 7 Query the AM working status on the local NE. 1.


2.


3.

Click Query. Transmit-End Modulation mode should be Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity of a preset value.

NOTE

When adverse weather prevails, the current modulation mode may be lower than the value of Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity.

----End

6.4 Testing Protection Switching By testing protection switching, you can determine whether the protection switching is normal over radio links. 6.4.1 Testing IF 1+1 Switching You can verify whether the IF 1+1 protection function is in the normal state by checking the working board of the IF 1+1 protection group before and after the switching. 6.4.2 Testing ERPS Switching You can verify whether the ERPS function is in the normal state by checking the port status of the ERPS protection group before and after the switching.

6.4.1 Testing IF 1+1 Switching You can verify whether the IF 1+1 protection function is in the normal state by checking the working board of the IF 1+1 protection group before and after the switching.

Prerequisite l


l

The equipment is configured with IF 1+1 protection.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


6-7



l

Ethernet services are configured.


Test Connection Diagram Figure 6-2 Configuration for testing IF 1+1 switching NE A and NE B are configured as follows: l

Main IF board: ISU2 in slot 3

l

Standby IF board: ISU2 in slot 5

l

Main ODU: ODU in slot 23

l

Standby ODU: ODU in slot 25

NE A

NE B

As shown in Figure 6-2, the following procedures use the Ethernet services between NE A and NE B that are configured with 1+1 HSB protection as an example. NOTE

l If Working Mode of the IF 1+1 protection is set to HSB, TX Status should be set to Mute for the ODU on the main channel of NE A, and Enable Reverse Switching should be set to Enable. The switching occurs at NE A. l If Working Mode of the IF 1+1 protection is set to SD, TX Status should be set to Mute for the ODU on the main channel of NE A, and Enable Reverse Switching should be set to Enable. The switching occurs at NE A. l If Working Mode of the IF 1+1 protection is set to FD, TX Status should be set to Mute for the ODU on the main channel of NE B. The switching occurs at NE A.

Precautions NOTE

You can compare the values of Active Board of Device or Active Board of Channel in Protection Group before the protection switching occurs and after the protection switching is complete.

Procedure Step 1 Set Enable Reverse Switching in the 1+1 HSB protection group for NE A. 1.

6-8

Select the desired NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and choose Configuration > IF 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



2.

Select the corresponding protection group in Protection Group, and set Enable Reverse Switching to Enable.

3.

Click Apply.

4.

Click Close.

Step 2 Before the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE A. 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and choose Configuration > IF 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree.

2.

Select the corresponding protection group in Protection Group, and click Query.

3.

In Protection Group, the value of Active Board of Device should be the main IF board 3-ISU2.

Step 3 Set TX Status to Mute for the main ODU 23-ODU of NE A. 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.

3.

Select the desired ODU, and set TX Status to Mute.

4.

Click Apply.

Step 4 Refer to 6.2 Testing Ethernet Services to test availability of the Ethernet services. Step 5 After the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE A. 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and choose Configuration > IF 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree.

2.

Select the corresponding protection group in Protection Group, and click Query.

3.

In Protection Group, the value of Active Board of Device should be the standby IF board 5-ISU2.

Step 6 Set TX Status to Unmute for the main ODU 23-ODU of NE A. 1.


2.


3.

Select the desired ODU, and set TX Status to Unmute.

4.

Click Apply.

Step 7 Restore the setting of Enable Reverse Switching in Step 1. 1.

Select the desired NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and choose Configuration > IF 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree.

2.

Select the corresponding protection group in Protection Group, and set Enable Reverse Switching to Disable.

3.

Click Apply.

4.

Click Close.

----End Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


6-9



6.4.2 Testing ERPS Switching You can verify whether the ERPS function is in the normal state by checking the port status of the ERPS protection group before and after the switching.

Prerequisite l

The equipment is configured with ERPS.

l

The network cable for carrying the working and protection Ethernet services of ERPS is properly connected.


Test Connection Diagram As shown in Figure 6-3, the following procedures use the Ethernet services that are configured with ERPS between NE A and NE D as an example. The RPL owner node is NE D. Figure 6-3 Configuration for testing ERPS NE A, NE B, NE C, and NE D are configured as follows:

6-10

l

West IF board: ISU2 in slot 3

l

East IF board: ISU2 in slot 5

l

West ODU: ODU in slot 23

l

East ODU: ODU in slot 25


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



West

East

NE B Protection channel West

East

NE A

NE D

East West

Working channel West

NE C East

Procedure Step 1 Before the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE D. 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE D, and choose Configuration > Ethernet Protection > ERPS Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Select the ERPS protection group to be queried, and click Query.

3.

The value of State Machine Status should be Idle.

Step 2 Refer to 6.2 Testing Ethernet Services to test availability of the Ethernet services. The LossRate in the Detection Result should be 0. Step 3 Set TX Status to Mute for the west ODU 23-ODU of NE A. Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


6-11



1.


2.


3.

Select the desired ODU, and set TX Status to Mute.

4.

Click Apply.

Step 4 After the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE D. 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE D, and choose Configuration > Ethernet Protection > ERPS Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Select the ERPS protection group to be queried, and click Query.

3.

The value of State Machine Status should be Protection.

Step 5 Refer to 6.2 Testing Ethernet Services to test availability of the Ethernet services. The LossRate in the Detection Result should be 0. Step 6 Set TX Status to Unmute for the west ODU 23-ODU of NE A. 1.


2.


3.

Select the desired ODU, and set TX Status to Unmute.

4.

Click Apply.

----End

6.5 Checking the Clock Status Check the clock status for each NE to ensure that the clocks of all the NEs on a radio network are synchronized.

Prerequisite The clock configuration is complete. The link that transmits clocks is in the normal state.


Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Clock > Physical Clock > Clock Synchronization Status from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Query. NOTE

l If the clock of an NE is selected as the working clock of the radio network, this clock should be in freerun mode and the clocks of the other NEs should be in locked mode. l If a service clock is selected as the working clock of the radio network, the clocks of all the NEs should be in locked mode.

6-12


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



Step 3 Repeat Step 1 through Step 2 to check the working modes of the other NEs on the radio network. ----End

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


6-13


7


Configuring Networkwide Service Data

About This Chapter Services can be transmitted in IP radio mode only after networkwide service data is configured. 7.1 Basic Concepts Before configuring networkwide service data, be familiar with related basic concepts. 7.2 Configuration Procedure This section describes the procedures for configuring networks, radio links, Ethernet services, and clocks. 7.3 Configuration Example (Networkwide Data Services) This section describes how to configure data services on an IP radio ring network according to the network plan.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


7-1



7.1 Basic Concepts Before configuring networkwide service data, be familiar with related basic concepts. 7.1.1 DCN The network management system (NMS) communicates with a transmission network element (NE) through the data communication network (DCN) to manage and maintain the NE. 7.1.2 GNE and Non-GNE A gateway NE (GNE) refers to an NE whose application layer communicates directly with the NMS application layer. A non-GNE refers to an NE whose application layer communicates with the NMS application layer by forwarding data through the GNE application layer. 7.1.3 NE ID and NE IP Address The ID and IP address are the unique NE on the DCN. 7.1.4 Physical Boards and Logical Boards The NE software and NMS consider a physical board as one or more logical boards when managing the physical board. 7.1.5 Adaptive Modulation The adaptive modulation (AM) technology adjusts the modulation scheme automatically based on channel quality. 7.1.6 CCDP and XPIC The co-channel dual-polarization (CCDP) and cross-polarization interference cancellation (XPIC) technologies are developed based on microwave polarization characteristics. The CCDP, wherein two signals are transmitted over two orthogonal polarization waves, doubles the transmission capacity; the XPIC cancels the cross-polarization interference between the two polarization waves. 7.1.7 RF Configuration Modes The OptiX RTN 950 supports four RF configuration modes, namely, 1+0 non-protection configuration, N+0 non-protection configuration, 1+1 protection configuration and crosspolarization interference cancellation (XPIC) configuration. 7.1.8 Ethernet Port Numbers On the NMS, Ethernet ports are represented by PORTs. 7.1.9 IF_ETH Port IF boards used in IP radio use their IF_ETH ports to receive services from and transmit services to the packet plane. 7.1.10 Auto-Negotiation The auto-negotiation function allows the network equipment to send information about its supported working mode to the opposite end of the network and to receive corresponding information that the opposite end may transfer. 7.1.11 Flow Control Function When the equipment fails to handle the traffic received at the port due to poor data processing/ transferring capability, the line becomes congested. This also causes buffer overflow and therefore some packets will be discarded. To reduce the number of packets to be discarded, take appropriate flow control measures. 7.1.12 MAC Address Table Management 7-2


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



The entries in a MAC address table show the mappings between MAC addresses and ports. A MAC address table contains dynamic entries, static entries, and blacklist entries. 7.1.13 Split Horizon Group To separate services that are converged and to prevent a broadcast storm resulting from a service loop, you can configure a split horizon group for the E-LAN services at the specified nodes. After the configuration, the logical ports in one split horizon group cannot forward packets to each other. 7.1.14 Protection for Native Ethernet Services The OptiX RTN 950 supports three protection modes for Native Ethernet services, namely, Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS), link aggregation group (LAG), and multiple spanning tree protocol (MSTP). 7.1.15 Clock Source A clock source is a signal source that carries timing reference information. An NE implements clock synchronization, by using its phase locked loop (PLL) to lock the timing information of the clock source. 7.1.16 Clock Protection Modes The OptiX RTN 950 supports clock source protection based on priorities, synchronization status message (SSM) protection, and extended SSM protection. 7.1.17 Clock Synchronization Policy Users plan an appropriate clock synchronization policy based on the network topology.

7.1.1 DCN The network management system (NMS) communicates with a transmission network element (NE) through the data communication network (DCN) to manage and maintain the NE.

Overview On a DCN, both the NMS and NEs are DCN nodes. The DCN between the NMS and NEs is called an external DCN, and the DCN between NEs is called an internal DCN. The OptiX RTN 950 supports several DCN solutions, including Huawei embedded control channel (HWECC), IP over DCC, and inband DCN.

IP over DCC Solution Figure 7-1 shows how network management messages are transmitted in the IP over DCC solution. Encapsulated in the IP protocol stack, different vendors' network management messages are transmitted in one of the following ways: through DCCs carried by microwave, or over the Ethernet between Ethernet network management ports or between NE cascading ports.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


7-3



Figure 7-1 IP over DCC solution

OptiX Msg IP stack DCC

3rd-party Msg IP stack ETH

3rd-party Msg IP stack DCC


Third-party NMS

OptiX NMS

OptiX Msg IP stack ETH

OptiX Msg IP stack DCC


3rd-party Msg IP stack DCC

OptiX equipment Ethernet link

Third-party equipment Radio link

Fiber

Inband DCN Solution In the inband DCN solution, network management messages are transmitted over IP radio or through FE/GE ports by using part of the Ethernet service bandwidth, as shown in Figure 7-2. Figure 7-2 Inband DCN solution OptiX Msg IP IP MW

OptiX Msg IP IP MW

OptiX Msg IP FE/GE

OptiX Msg IP FE/GE

OptiX Msg IP FE/GE

NMS OptiX Msg IP FE/GE

OptiX RTN 910/950

7-4

Layer 2 Switch


Ethernet link

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



HWECC Solution HWECC is a DCN solution provided by Huawei. In this solution, the U2000 manages NEs by using network management messages that are encapsulated in the HWECC protocol stack. When the HWECC solution is used, network management messages are encapsulated in the proprietary HWECC protocol stack for transmission. The HWECC solution is therefore only applicable when the network is only comprised of the OptiX RTN equipment that supports the HWECC protocol stack. Figure 7-3 shows how network management messages are transmitted in the HWECC solution. Network management messages encapsulated in compliance with the HWECC protocol stack can be transmitted through DCCs carried by the IP radio, or transmitted over the Ethernet between Ethernet NM ports or between NE cascading ports. Figure 7-3 HWECC solution Message HWECC DCC

Message HWECC ETH Message HWECC DCC

Message HWECC DCC

NMC

Message HWECC DCC

Message HWECC DCC

OptiX radio transmission equipment

Radio link

Ethernet link

Comparison Between the IP over DCC Solution, the Inband DCN Solution, and the HWECC Solution Table 7-1 compares the IP over DCC solution, the inband DCN solution, and the HWECC solution.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


7-5



Table 7-1 Comparison between the IP over DCC solution, the inband DCN solution, and the HWECC solution DCN Solution

Advantage

Disadvantage

IP over DCC

In the IP over DCN solution, DCN information is transmitted over microwave DCCs without using service bandwidth.

Limited DCN bandwidth is available.

In the inband DCN solution, DCN information is transmitted through microwave or FE/GE ports. This solution covers more scenarios.

Part of service bandwidth is used.

Inband DCN

DCN information cannot be transmitted through FE/GE ports.

VLAN resources are used.

Sufficient DCN bandwidth (512 kbit/s by default) is available. In addition, bandwidth expansion is supported. HWECC

HWECC is preferred as the DCN solution when the network is only comprised of the OptiX RTN equipment that supports the HWECC protocol stack. The HWECC solution is easy to configure and use.

As the HWECC protocol is a proprietary protocol, the HWECC solution is inapplicable to network management when the network is comprised of OptiX RTN equipment and third-party equipment.

7.1.2 GNE and Non-GNE A gateway NE (GNE) refers to an NE whose application layer communicates directly with the NMS application layer. A non-GNE refers to an NE whose application layer communicates with the NMS application layer by forwarding data through the GNE application layer.

GNE Generally, a GNE is connected to the NMS through a local area network (LAN) or wide area network (WAN). Its application layer can directly communicate with the NMS application layer. One set of NMS needs to be connected to one or more GNEs. ECC communication between the GNEs may create an oversized DCN. To prevent this, disable extended ECC for the GNEs.

Non-GNE A non-GNE communicates with the GNE through the DCN channels between NEs. It is recommended that fewer than 50 non-GNEs are affiliated to a GNE. 7-6


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



7.1.3 NE ID and NE IP Address The ID and IP address are the unique NE on the DCN.

NE ID At the application layer of each DCN solution, an NE uses its NE ID as the NE address. Therefore, each NE must have a unique NE ID on the DCN and all these NE IDs must be planned in a unified manner. The NE ID has 24 bits. The most significant eight bits represent the subnet ID (or the extended ID) and the least significant 16 bits represent the basic ID. For example, if an NE ID is 0x090001, the subnet ID is 9 and the basic ID is 1.

NE IP Address An NE uses an IP address as its unique identifier during TCP/IP communication. In the DCN solutions (for example, IP over DCC and inband DCN) where network management messages are transmitted over TCP/IP, an NE IP address is used as the NE address at the network layer. Therefore, each NE IP address on the DCN must be unique and all these NE IP addresses must be planned in a unified manner. By default (which indicates that an NE IP address is never manually changed), this NE IP address is automatically changed to 0x81000000 + ID if the NE ID is changed. For example, if an NE IP address is never manually changed, this NE IP address is automatically changed to 129.9.0.1 when the NE ID is changed to 0x090001. Once an NE IP address is manually changed, the interlocking relationship between the NE ID and NE IP address no longer takes effect. It is recommended to configure the IP address of a GNE on a different network segment from the IP addresses of its non-GNEs.

7.1.4 Physical Boards and Logical Boards The NE software and NMS consider a physical board as one or more logical boards when managing the physical board. Table 7-2 provides the mappings between the physical boards and logical boards. Table 7-2 Mappings between the physical boards and logical boards

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)

Physical Board

Logical Board

CSH

CSH in the same slot

AUX

AUX in the same slot

ISU2

ISU2 in the same slot

ISX2

ISX2 in the same slot

EM6T

EM6T in the same slot

EM6F

EM6F in the same slot

PIU

PIU in the same slot Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-7



Physical Board

Logical Board

FAN

FAN in the same slot

ODU

ODU in the slot whose number is 20 plus the slot number for the IF board that is connected to the ODU

7.1.5 Adaptive Modulation The adaptive modulation (AM) technology adjusts the modulation scheme automatically based on channel quality. When the AM technology is used, in the case of the same channel spacing, the microwave service bandwidth varies according to the modulation scheme; the higher the modulation efficiency, the higher the bandwidth of the transmitted services. With the QoS technology, packet services are scheduled to queues with different priorities. The services in different queues then are transmitted to a microwave port by using the queue scheduling algorithms. Under all channel conditions, the service capacity varies according to the modulation scheme. Figure 7-4 provides illustrates how the modulation mode is adjusted according to varying weather condition.

7-8

l

When the channel quality is good (such as on days when weather conditions are favorable), the equipment adopts a high-efficiency modulation scheme to transmit more user services. This improves transmission efficiency and spectrum utilization of the system.

l

When the channel quality deteriorates (such as on days with adverse weather), the equipment adopts a low-efficiency modulation scheme to transmit only higher-priority services within the available bandwidth and to discard lower-priority services. If lowerpriority queues are congested due to insufficient capacity of the air interface, some or all services in these queues will be discarded. This improves anti-interference capability of a radio link and therefore ensures the link availability for higher-priority services.


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



Figure 7-4 Adaptive modulation

256QAM 128QAM 64QAM 32QAM 16QAM

QPSK 16QAM

Channel capability

32QAM 64QAM 128QAM

Packet services

256QAM

The AM technology used by the OptiX RTN 950 has the following characteristics: l

The AM technology uses the QPSK, 16QAM, 32QAM, 64QAM, 128QAM, and 256QAM modulation schemes.

l

The lowest-efficiency modulation scheme (also called reference scheme or modulation scheme of guaranteed capacity) and the highest-efficiency modulation scheme (also called nominal scheme or modulation scheme of full capacity) used by the AM can be configured.

l

In AM, when modulation schemes are switched, the transmit frequency, receive frequency, and channel spacing remain unchanged.

l

In AM, modulation schemes are switched step-by-step.

l

In AM, modulation scheme switching is hitless. When the modulation scheme is downshifted, high-priority services will not be affected when low-priority services are discarded. The switching is successful even when 100 dB/s channel fast fading occurs.

7.1.6 CCDP and XPIC The co-channel dual-polarization (CCDP) and cross-polarization interference cancellation (XPIC) technologies are developed based on microwave polarization characteristics. The CCDP, wherein two signals are transmitted over two orthogonal polarization waves, doubles the transmission capacity; the XPIC cancels the cross-polarization interference between the two polarization waves. Microwave transmission can be classified into single-polarized transmission and CCDP transmission by polarization transmission mode. Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


7-9



l

In single-polarized transmission, a signal is transmitted over the horizontally polarized wave or the vertically polarized wave on the same channel, as shown in Figure 7-5.

l

In CCDP transmission, two signals are transmitted over the horizontally polarized wave and the vertically polarized wave on the same channel, as shown in Figure 7-6.

The capacity in CCDP transmission mode is double the capacity in single-polarized transmission mode. Figure 7-5 Single-polarized transmission

Figure 7-6 CCDP transmission

The ideal situation of CCDP transmission is that no interference exists between the two orthogonal signals that operate at the same frequency, and then the receiver can easily recover the two signals. In actual engineering conditions, however, regardless of the orthogonality of the two signals, certain interference between the signals exists, due to cross-polarization discrimination (XPD) of the antenna and channel deterioration. To cancel the interference, the XPIC technology is adopted to receive and process the signals in the horizontal and vertical directions, so that the original signals are recovered. The characteristics of the XPIC function supported by the OptiX RTN 950 are as follows: l

The XPD tolerance is increased, and the notch performance is improved.

l

The maximum difference between the IF cables in two polarization directions of an XPIC workgroup cannot exceed 12 meters in length.

l

The XPIC function is implemented totally based on hardware.

7.1.7 RF Configuration Modes The OptiX RTN 950 supports four RF configuration modes, namely, 1+0 non-protection configuration, N+0 non-protection configuration, 1+1 protection configuration and crosspolarization interference cancellation (XPIC) configuration. 7-10


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



1+0 Non-Protection Configuration The 1+0 non-protection configuration indicates that the radio link has one working channel and no protection channel.

N+0 Non-Protection Configuration The N+0 non-protection configuration indicates that the radio link has N working channels and no protection channel. The OptiX RTN 950 supports N+0 protection (1 < N ≤5).

1+1 Protection Configuration The 1+1 protection configuration indicates that the radio link has one working channel and one protection channel. The 1+1 protection configuration is classified into 1+1 HSB, 1+1 FD, and 1+1 SD. l

In 1+1 HSB protection mode, the equipment provides a 1+1 hot standby configuration for the IF boards and ODUs at both ends of each hop of radio link, implementing the protection.

l

In 1+1 FD protection mode, the system uses two channels with a specific frequency interval to transmit and receive the same service signal. The opposite end selects one from the two received signals. With the 1+1 FD protection, the impact of the fading on signal transmission is reduced. The 1+1 FD protection also supports the 1+1 HSB protection.

l

In the 1+1 SD protection mode, the system uses two antennas with a space distance to receive the same RF signal. The equipment selects from the two received signals. With the 1+1 SD protection, the impact of the fading on signal transmission is reduced. The 1+1 SD protection also supports the 1+1 HSB protection.

XPIC Configuration The XPIC adopts both the horizontally polarized wave and the vertically polarized wave over one channel to transmit two channels of signals. The radio link capacity in XPIC configuration is double the radio link capacity in 1+0 configuration.

7.1.8 Ethernet Port Numbers On the NMS, Ethernet ports are represented by PORTs. l

For the EM6F, PORT1 and PORT2 represent GE1 and GE2 respectively; PORT3 to PORT6 represent FE1 to FE4 respectively.

l

For the EM6T, PORT1 and PORT2 represent GE1 and GE2 respectively; PORT3 to PORT6 represent FE1 to FE4 respectively.

7.1.9 IF_ETH Port IF boards used in IP radio use their IF_ETH ports to receive services from and transmit services to the packet plane. On the NMS, an IF_ETH port is displayed as Microwave Interface. An IF_ETH port is an internal GE port on a general IF board or a general XPIC IF board. Ethernet packets are transmitted to the local IF board through its IF_ETH ports, and then mapped into microwave Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


7-11



frames in IP radio mode. Ethernet packets demapped from the microwave frames in IP radio mode are transmitted to the packet switching unit through IF_ETH ports. The main differences between an IF_ETH port and a GE/FE port are as follows: l

An IF_ETH port is an internal Ethernet port. It transmits and receives MAC frames and does not support functions on the PHY layer.

l

The bandwidth at an IF_ETH port is equal to the Ethernet service bandwidth that IP radio supports. Therefore, when the AM function is enabled for IP radio, the bandwidth at an IF_ETH port varies according to the modulation mode. NOTE

Internal IF_ETH port and external IF ports have one-to-one mappings. Therefore, an internal IF_ETH port, similar to an external IF port, can be regarded as a port connected to the packet plane.

7.1.10 Auto-Negotiation The auto-negotiation function allows the network equipment to send information about its supported working mode to the opposite end of the network and to receive corresponding information that the opposite end may transfer.

Auto-Negotiation Function of FE Electrical Ports FE electrical ports may work in four common working modes: 10M half-duplex, 10M fullduplex, 100M half-duplex, and 100M full-duplex. If the working modes of the local FE electrical port and the opposite FE electrical port do not match, the two ports cannot communicate with each other. Auto-negotiation effectively resolves this problem. Auto-negotiation uses fast link pulses and normal link pulses to transfer negotiation information about the working mode; lastly, the working modes of the FE electrical ports match at both ends. Table 7-3 lists auto-negotiation rules for FE electrical ports. Table 7-3 Auto-negotiation rules for FE electrical ports (when the local FE electrical port works in auto-negotiation mode) Working Mode of the Opposite FE Electrical Port

Auto-Negotiation Result

Auto-negotiation

100M full-duplex

10M half-duplex

10M half-duplex

10M full-duplex

10M half-duplex

100M half-duplex

100M half-duplex

100M full-duplex

100M half-duplex

NOTE

As provided in Table 7-3, when the opposite FE electrical port works in 10M full-duplex or 100M full-duplex mode, auto-negotiation does not necessarily achieve full matching between the working modes of the FE electrical ports at both ends. As a result, some packets are lost. Therefore, when the opposite FE electrical port works in 10M full-duplex or 100M full-duplex mode, set the working mode of the local FE electrical port to 10M full-duplex or 100M full-duplex.

7-12


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



When the FE electrical ports at both ends work in auto-negotiation mode, the equipment at both ends can negotiate flow control.

Auto-Negotiation Function of GE Electrical Ports GE electrical ports can work in five working modes: 10M half-duplex, 10M full-duplex, 100M half-duplex, 100M full-duplex, and 1000M full-duplex. Auto-negotiation of GE electrical ports is similar to FE electrical port auto-negotiation. Table 7-4 lists auto-negotiation rules for GE electrical ports.

Table 7-4 Auto-negotiation rules for GE electrical ports (when the local GE electrical port works in auto-negotiation mode) Working Mode of the Opposite GE Electrical Port

Auto-Negotiation Result

Auto-negotiation (GE electrical port)

1000M full-duplex

Auto-negotiation (FE electrical port)

100M full-duplex

10M half-duplex

10M half-duplex

10M full-duplex

10M half-duplex

100M half-duplex

100M half-duplex

100M full-duplex

100M half-duplex

1000M full-duplex

1000M full-duplex

NOTE

As provided in Table 7-4, when the opposite GE electrical port works in 10M full-duplex or 100M full-duplex mode, auto-negotiation does not necessarily achieve full matching between the working modes of the GE electrical ports at both ends. As a result, some packets are lost. Therefore, when the opposite GE electrical port works in 10M full-duplex or 100M full-duplex mode, set the working mode of the local GE electrical port to 10M full-duplex or 100M full-duplex.

When the GE electrical ports at both ends work in auto-negotiation mode, the equipment at both ends can negotiate flow control.

Auto-Negotiation Function of GE Optical Ports GE optical ports support only 1000M full-duplex working mode. Auto-negotiation of GE optical ports is used only for negotiating flow control.

7.1.11 Flow Control Function When the equipment fails to handle the traffic received at the port due to poor data processing/ transferring capability, the line becomes congested. This also causes buffer overflow and therefore some packets will be discarded. To reduce the number of packets to be discarded, take appropriate flow control measures. Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


7-13



Half-duplex Ethernet uses a back-pressure mechanism to control flow. Full-duplex Ethernet uses PAUSE frames to control flow. Currently, half-duplex Ethernet is not widely applied; therefore, flow control implemented on the equipment is used for full-duplex Ethernet. The flow control function on the equipment is classified into two types: auto-negotiation flow control and non-auto-negotiation flow control.

Auto-Negotiation Flow Control When an Ethernet port works in auto-negotiation mode, use auto-negotiation flow control. The auto-negotiation flow control modes include the following: l

Asymmetric PAUSE toward the link partner The port can transmit PAUSE frames in case of congestion but cannot process received PAUSE frames.

l

Symmetric PAUSE The port can transmit PAUSE frames and process received PAUSE frames.

l

Both asymmetric and symmetric PAUSE The port has the following capabilities: – Transmits and processes PAUSE frames. – Transmits PAUSE frames but cannot process received PAUSE frames. – Processes received PAUSE frames but cannot transmit PAUSE frames.

l

Disabled The port does not transmit or process PAUSE frames. NOTE

On the NMS, the OptiX RTN 950 supports only two auto-negotiation flow control modes: Disabled mode and Enable Symmetric Flow Control (symmetric PAUSE) mode.

Non-Auto-Negotiation Flow Control When an Ethernet port works in a fixed working mode, use non-auto-negotiation flow control. The non-auto-negotiation flow control modes include the following: l

Send only The port can transmit PAUSE frames in case of congestion but cannot process received PAUSE frames.

l

Receive only The port can process received PAUSE frames but cannot transmit PAUSE frames in case of congestion.

l

Symmetric The port can transmit PAUSE frames and can also process received PAUSE frames.

l

Disabled The port does not transmit or process PAUSE frames. NOTE

On the NMS, the OptiX RTN 950 supports only two non-auto-negotiation flow control modes: Disabled mode and Enable Symmetric Flow Control (symmetric) mode.

7-14


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



7.1.12 MAC Address Table Management The entries in a MAC address table show the mappings between MAC addresses and ports. A MAC address table contains dynamic entries, static entries, and blacklist entries. l

Dynamic entry A dynamic entry is obtained by learning of a bridge through the SVL/IVL mode. The dynamic entry will be aged.

l

Static entry A static entry is manually added to the MAC address table by a network administrator using the NMS. The static entry will not be aged. Generally, the static entry is configured for a port if a device with a known MAC address is mounted to the port and this device transmits large traffic for a long time.

l

Blacklist entry A blacklist entry is a MAC disabled entry and is used to discard a data frame that contains a specified MAC address (source MAC address or destination MAC address). A blacklist entry is also called a blackhole entry. The blacklist entry is configured by the network administrator. The blacklist entry does not age, and is not lost after the Ethernet processing board is reset. NOTE

A routing entry is automatically deleted when that routing entry is not updated within a specified period. This occurs when no new packet from this MAC address is received to enable the re-learning of this MAC address. This mechanism is called aging, and this period is called aging time.

7.1.13 Split Horizon Group To separate services that are converged and to prevent a broadcast storm resulting from a service loop, you can configure a split horizon group for the E-LAN services at the specified nodes. After the configuration, the logical ports in one split horizon group cannot forward packets to each other. Figure 7-7 shows a typical application of the split horizon group. NEs on the network are configured with E-LAN services, and the east and west ports and service access ports are configured as mounted ports of a bridge. In this case, if a split horizon group is not configured at NE1, broadcast storm occurs due to a network loop as the east and west ports can forward packets to each other. If a split horizon group is created at NE1 and the east and west ports are configured as members of the split horizon group, the east and west ports do not forward packets to each other. Therefore, a service loop is prevented.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


7-15



Figure 7-7 Split horizon group NE1 BSC

Split horizon group

BTS NE2

NE4

BTS

BTS

NE3 BTS

NOTE

l ERPS can prevent a service loop on a ring network. If ERPS is already enabled for a ring network, a split horizon group is not needed as it may affect ERPS operation. l On the OptiX RTN 950, only the split horizon group configuration based on physical ports is supported. Therefore, if a physical port is mapped into several logical ports and one of these logical ports is a member of a split horizon group, the other logical ports are added to the split horizon group automatically.

7.1.14 Protection for Native Ethernet Services The OptiX RTN 950 supports three protection modes for Native Ethernet services, namely, Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS), link aggregation group (LAG), and multiple spanning tree protocol (MSTP).

ERPS ERPS is applicable to ring physical networks and can provide protection for the E-LAN services between all the nodes on the ring network. Generally, when a ring network is configured with ERPS, the RPL node blocks the RPL port on one side so that all the services are transmitted through the ports on the other side. In this manner, service loops are prevented. If a section of link fails or an NE becomes faulty, the RPL node unblocks its RPL port so that the services are switched from the faulty point to the RPL port for transmission. In this manner, protection for the ring network is achieved. The Ethernet ring network shown in Figure 7-8 is configured with ERPS. Generally, the RPL node (NE D) blocks its RPL port that is connected to NE A, and all the services are transmitted over the link NE A <-> NE B <-> NE C <-> NE D. When the link between NE A <-> NE B becomes faulty, NE D unblocks the blocked port so that the services can be transmitted over the link NE A <-> NE D <-> NE C <-> NE B.

7-16


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



Figure 7-8 Implementation of ERPS

NE A

NE D

NE B

NE C

Protection switching

Failure

NE A

NE D

NE B

NE C Link Ethernet service direction Blocked port

LAG Link aggregation allows multiple links that are attached to the same equipment to be aggregated to form a link aggregation group (LAG) so that the bandwidths and availability of the links increase. The aggregated links can be considered as a single logical link. As shown in Figure 7-9, the LAG provides the following functions: l Issue 02 (2011-05-20)

Increased the link capacity Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-17



The LAG provides users with a cost-effective method for increasing link bandwidth. The users obtain data links with higher bandwidths by combining multiple physical links into one logical link without upgrading the existing equipment. The bandwidth of the logical link is equal to the sum of the bandwidths of the physical links. The aggregation module distributes the traffic to different members by using the load balancing algorithm, achieving the load balancing at the link level. l

Improved the link availability The links in a LAG provide backup for each other dynamically. When a link fails, another link in the LAG quickly takes over. This process in which link aggregation starts the backup link only applies to the links in the same LAG and it cannot be performed on links that are not in the LAG.

Figure 7-9 LAG Link 1 Link 2 Ethernet packet

Link 3

Ethernet packet

Link aggregation group

MSTP The OptiX RTN 950 supports only the MSTP protocol that uses the common and internal spanning tree (CIST). The MSTP that uses the CIST can be used as a rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP). The RSTP is applicable in case of a network loop. This protocol adopts certain algorithms to reconstruct a loop network into a loop-free tree network and therefore prevents Ethernet frames from increasing and cycling in an endless manner on the loop network. On the OptiX RTN 950, the MSTP is used to prevent a network loop on the access side. See Figure 7-10. When the user equipment is connected to the OptiX RTN 950 through two different trails, you can configure the ports on the OptiX RTN 950 that are connected to the user network into a port group. This port group, together with the switch on the user network, can run the MSTP. If a service access link becomes faulty, the MSTP enables a re-configuration to generate the spanning tree topology, providing protection for the user network that is configured with multiple access points.

7-18


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



Figure 7-10 Prevention of network loops on the access side Root

Root

Port group CIST Blocked Port

7.1.15 Clock Source A clock source is a signal source that carries timing reference information. An NE implements clock synchronization, by using its phase locked loop (PLL) to lock the timing information of the clock source. The OptiX RTN 950 supports the following clock sources: l

Radio clock source: refers to a clock source that is extracted from the received radio signal.

l

Ethernet clock source: refers to a clock source that is extracted from the Ethernet stream.

l

Internal clock source: refers to a clock source that is generated through the free-run oscillation of an NE built-in clock. The internal clock source has the lowest priority.

7.1.16 Clock Protection Modes The OptiX RTN 950 supports clock source protection based on priorities, synchronization status message (SSM) protection, and extended SSM protection.

Clock Source Protection Based on Priorities Clock source protection is provided based on the priorities specified in the clock source priority list. When a clock source with a higher priority fails, a clock source with a lower priority is used. As shown in Figure 7-11, the radio links between NE1 and NE2 adopt 1+1 HSB protection. NE2 needs to trace the clock on the radio links to keep synchronized with NE1. In this case, the clock sources extracted by the main and standby IF boards can be configured in the clock source priority list. The clock source extracted by the main IF board, however, has a higher priority. Therefore, if the 1+1 HSB protection switching occurs on the radio links, the clock can be switched at the same time.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


7-19



Figure 7-11 Clock source protection based on priorities 1+1 HSB configuration

FE/GE

BSC

NE1

NE2

Clock

SSM Protection SSM protection enables automatic clock source switching to prevent timing loops. The OptiX RTN 950 supports SSM protection. After SSM protection is enabled on an NE, automatic protection switching of clock sources follows these rules: l

According to the clock source priority list, the NE selects the clock source of the highest quality as the synchronization source.

l

If multiple clock sources have the same highest quality, the NE selects the source with the highest priority as the synchronization source.

l

The NE broadcasts quality information about the synchronization clock source to its downstream NEs and also notifies its upstream NE that its own clock source cannot be used for synchronization.

Figure 7-12 is a radio ring where SSM protection is enabled. When the network operates normally, the NEs on the ring select the clock source as follows: 1.

NE1 selects the external clock source as the synchronization source and notifies NE2 and NE4 of the external clock quality.

2.

NE2 and NE4 select the clock source from NE1 as the synchronization source and notify NE1 that the clock sources from NE2 and NE4 are unavailable.

3.

After determining that the clock sources from NE2 and NE4 have the same quality, NE3 selects the clock source with a higher priority (the clock source from NE2) as the synchronization source. In addition, NE3 transmits quality information about the synchronization source to NE4 and notifies NE2 that the clock source from NE3 is unavailable.

4.

After determining that the clock sources from NE1 and NE3 have the same quality, NE4 selects the clock source with a higher priority (the clock source from NE3) as the synchronization source. In addition, NE4 transmits quality information about the synchronization source to NE1 and notifies NE3 that the clock source from NE4 is unavailable.

5.

According to the clock quality in the west and east directions and configured clock source priorities, NE2, NE3, and NE4 determine that the synchronization source does not need to be modified. The clock source selection is completed.

When the radio links between NE1 and NE2 become faulty, the NEs on the ring select the clock source as follows: 7-20


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



1.

NE2 selects the internal source as the synchronization source and transmits quality information about the synchronization source to NE1 and NE3.

2.

NE3 selects NE2 as the clock source and notifies NE4 of the clock quality.

3.

After determining that the quality of the clock from NE1 is higher than the quality of the clock from NE3, NE4 selects the clock source from NE1 as the synchronization source. In addition, NE4 transmits quality information about the synchronization source to NE3 and notifies NE1 that the clock from NE4 is unavailable.

4.

After determining that the quality of the clock from NE4 is higher than the quality of the clock from NE2, NE3 selects the clock source from NE4 as the synchronization source. In addition, NE3 transmits quality information about the synchronization source to NE2 and notifies NE4 that the clock source from NE3 is unavailable.

5.

After determining that the quality of the clock from NE3 is higher than the quality of the internal clock source, NE2 selects the clock source from NE3 as the synchronization source. In addition, NE2 transmits quality information about the synchronization source to NE1 and notifies NE3 that the clock source from NE2 is unavailable.

6.

According to the clock quality in the west and east directions and the configured clock source priorities, NE2, NE3, and NE4 determine that the synchronization source does not need to be modified. The clock source selection is completed. NOTE

Even though SSM protection is enabled, clocks cannot constitute a ring during clock source configuration. For example, configuration of clock sources on NE1 prevents a clock ring, as shown in Figure 7-12.

Figure 7-12 SSM protection BSC FE/GE

W

West/East/ Internal NE2

E

NE1 Ethernet interface/ Internal

W

E

E

W W

West/East/ Internal NE4

E

Master clock NE3

West/East/ Internal

Extended SSM Protection Extended SSM protection uses the extended SSM protocol to provide clock protection. The extended SSM protocol, developed by Huawei on the basis of the SSM protocol, introduces the concept of clock ID, which indicates that a clock ID can be defined for any clock source. The clock ID of the synchronization source can be transmitted together with the SSM and be used for automatic clock switching. The OptiX RTN 950 supports extended SSM protection on FE/ GE links and radio links. Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


7-21



After extended SSM protection is enabled on an NE, automatic clock switching follows these rules: l

According to the clock source priority list, the NE selects the clock source of the highest quality as the synchronization source.

l

If the clock ID of a clock source indicates that the clock source is from the local NE, the clock source is not processed.

l

If multiple clock sources have the same highest quality, the NE selects the source with the highest priority as the synchronization source.

l

The NE broadcasts quality information and the clock ID of the synchronization clock source to its downstream NEs, and also notifies its upstream NE that its own clock source cannot be used for synchronization.

The clock ID takes a value in the range of 0 to 15. 0 is the default value, indicating that the clock ID is invalid. After the extended SSM protocol is enabled on the NE, the NE does not select any clock source with an ID of 0 as its current clock source. Follow these guidelines when you allocate clock IDs: l

When the extended SSM is used, the clock ID of an external clock source cannot be automatically extracted. Therefore, allocate clock IDs to all external clock sources.

l

At all the NEs that are connected to external clock sources, allocate clock IDs to the internal clock sources.

l

At all the intersecting nodes of a ring/chain and a ring, allocate clock IDs to the internal clock sources.

l

At all the intersecting nodes of a ring/chain and a ring, allocate clock IDs to the clock sources that are transmitted to the ring.

l

Do not allocate clock IDs to clock sources different from the preceding four types. Their clock IDs are 0 by default.

l

Clock IDs do not determine clock source priorities.

Figure 7-13 is a radio ring where the extended SSM protection is enabled. On the ring, the following clock sources require clock IDs:

7-22

l

Ethernet interface 1 on NE1

l

Ethernet interface 2 on NE3

l

Internal clock source on NE1

l

Internal clock source on NE3


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



Figure 7-13 Extended SSM protection Master FE/GE

W

West / East / Internal

NE1 Ethernet interface 1 / West / East / Internal

W

E

E West / East / Internal

NE2

E

W

FE/GE Master clock

NE4

E

W

NE3

West / East / Ethernet interface 2 / Internal

Slave

NOTE

l When extended SSM protection is enabled, clocks can constitute a ring during clock source configuration. l Extended SSM protection is advantageous in complex clock protection network topologies, for example, in a network with dual external clocks. Therefore, extended SSM protection is used in only a few scenarios.

7.1.17 Clock Synchronization Policy Users plan an appropriate clock synchronization policy based on the network topology.

Clock Synchronization Policy for a Chain Network For a chain network consisting of radio links, follow these guidelines to plan the clock synchronization policy: l

If one clock source is input into the master (source) node (the clock source can be an Ethernet clock), configure this clock source for this node.

l

For the other nodes, configure the clock sources from their upper level radio links.

l

If 1+1 protection is configured for the upper level radio links of a node, configure two radio clock sources for this node. The clock source on the active radio link has a higher priority than the clock source on the standby radio link.

l

If a node has multiple upper level radio links (for example, the upper level radio links use the XPIC configuration), configure one radio clock source for each radio link. Allocate priorities to these radio clock sources depending on the radio link status.

l

Do not configure synchronization status message (SSM) or extended SSM protection.

Figure 7-14 shows the clock synchronization policy for a chain network. l

On the master node (NE1), one Ethernet clock source is input. For NE1, clock source priorities are allocated in descending order as follows:

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


7-23



Ethernet clock source > internal clock source. l

The ISU2 boards in slots 3 and 5 on NE2 form a 1+1 IF protection group, where the ISU2 board in slot 3 functions as the main board; in addition, the radio links between NE1 and NE2 comprise the two ISU2 boards. For NE2, clock source priorities are allocated in descending order as follows: 3-ISU2-1 > 5-ISU2-1 > internal clock source.

l

The radio link between NE3 and NE2 comprises the ISU2 board in slot 3 on NE3. For NE3, clock source priorities are allocated in descending order as follows: 3-ISU2-1 > internal clock source.

l

Do not configure SSM or extended SSM protection.

Figure 7-14 Clock synchronization policy for a chain network BSC

NE1

NE2

NE3

FE/GE

Ethernet interface/ Internal

3-ISU2-1/ 5-ISU2-1/ Internal

3-ISU2-1/ Internal

Clock

Clock Synchronization Policy for a Tree Network A tree network derives from a chain network; therefore, a tree network can adopt the same clock synchronization policy as a chain network. Figure 7-15 shows the clock synchronization policy for a tree network.

7-24

l

On the master node (NE1), the Ethernet link connected to port 1 on the EM6T board in slot 2 provides a clock source. For NE1, clock source priorities are allocated in descending order as follows: 2-EM6T-1 > internal clock source.

l

The ISX2 boards in slots 3 and 5 on NE2 form an XPIC workgroup, where the ISX2 board in slot 3 uses the vertical polarization mode and the ISX2 board in slot 5 uses the horizontal polarization mode; in addition, the radio links between NE1 and NE2 comprise the two ISX2 boards. For NE2, clock source priorities are allocated in descending order as follows: 3-ISX2-1 > 5-ISX2-1 > internal clock source.

l


l


l

The radio link between NE5 and NE4 comprises the ISU2 board in slot 3 on NE5. For NE5, clock source priorities are allocated in descending order as follows: 3-ISU2-1 > internal clock source. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


l



Figure 7-15 Clock synchronization policy for a tree network NE3

NE1

3-ISU2-1/ Internal

NE2

NE4 BSC

2-EM6T-1/ Internal

3-ISX2-1/ 5-ISX2-1/ Internal

Clock

3-ISU2-1/ Internal

NE5

3-ISU2-1/ Internal

Clock Synchronization Policy for a Ring Network If a ring network comprises only radio links, follow these guidelines to plan the clock synchronization policy: Equally divide the ring into two chains and then plan the clock synchronization policy according to the policy for a chain network. Figure 7-16 shows the clock synchronization policy for a ring network. l

The ring network uses IP radio for transmission. Therefore, divide the ring into two chains at the master node (NE1): NE1-NE2-NE3 and NE1-NE4.

l

On the master node (NE1), the Ethernet link connected to port 1 on the EM6T board in slot 3 provides a clock source. For NE1, clock source priorities are allocated in descending order as follows: 3-EM6T-1 > internal clock source.

l

NE2 traces the clock of the master node. For NE2, clock source priorities are allocated in descending order as follows: west clock source > internal clock source.

l

NE3 traces the clock of NE2. For NE3, clock source priorities are allocated in descending order as follows: west clock source > internal clock source.

l

NE4 traces the clock of the master node (NE1). For NE4, clock source priorities are allocated in descending order as follows: east clock source > internal clock source.

l


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


7-25



Figure 7-16 Clock synchronization policy for a ring network NE1

BSC

3-EM6T-1/ Internal

W

W

E

E

West/ Internal NE2

E

W W

NE4

E

NE3

Clock

East/ Internal

West/ Internal

Clock Synchronization Policy for a Port Aggregation Network On a port aggregation network, services of several RTN NEs are aggregated to the upper level RTN NE through the Ethernet. Follow these guidelines to plan the clock synchronization policy for a port aggregation network: l

On the upper level NE, an Ethernet clock source is input.

l

A lower-level NE traces the Ethernet clock source of its upper-level NE.

l


Figure 7-17 Clock synchronization policy for a port aggregation network NE3 NE1

NE2 1-EM6T-1/ Internal

BSC

1-EM6T-1/ Internal


Clock

NE4

1-EM6T-1/ Internal

7.2 Configuration Procedure This section describes the procedures for configuring networks, radio links, Ethernet services, and clocks. 7-26


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



7.2.1 Configuration Procedure (Network) This section describes the procedures for configuring four topology objects: NEs, boards, fibers/ cables, and subnets. 7.2.2 Configuration Procedure (Radio Link) The configuration procedure varies according to the IP radio link configuration mode. 7.2.3 Configuration Procedure (IEEE 802.1q Bridge-Based E-LAN Services) Configuring IEEE 802.1q bridge-based services includes configuring the service information, port information, protection information, and QoS information, and verifying the service configurations. 7.2.4 Configuration Procedure (Clocks) Configuring clocks includes configuring clock sources, clock protection, and output clocks.

7.2.1 Configuration Procedure (Network) This section describes the procedures for configuring four topology objects: NEs, boards, fibers/ cables, and subnets. Figure 7-18 shows the configuration flowchart of the network topology.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


7-27



Figure 7-18 Configuration flowchart (network topology) Start

Create NEs.

Set NE attributes.

Configure logical boards.

Configure the HWECC solution.

Configure the IP over DCC solution.

Configure the inband DCN solution.

Configure DCN channels.

Synchronize the NE time.

Set the NE performance monitoring state.

Create fibers/cables and subnets. Required Optional

End

The procedures in the configuration flowchart are described as follows. NOTE

Skip the following operation tasks if they have been performed during NE commissioning: changing the NE ID and NE name, modifying NE communications parameters, and configuring logical boards and the DCN solution. It is because the configuration data will be updated on the U2000 during the NE data uploading process.

7-28


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



Creating NEs Table 7-5 Procedure for creating NEs Stage

Operation

1

Creating NEs by using the U2000

Description 8.2.1.2 Creating NEs by Using the Manual Method

It is recommended that you perform operations on the U2000 to add one or more NEs to a large network.

8.2.1.1 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method

It is recommended that you perform operations on the U2000 to add NEs in other scenarios. Set the parameters as follows:

To achieve SSL communication between the U2000 and the gateway NE, set Connection Mode to Security SSL. Otherwise, Connection Mode takes its default value.

l Search Mode: Set Search Mode to Search for NE. l Search Domain: When the IP address of the gateway NE is known, it is recommended that you set the IP address range of the gateway NE as Search Domain. For initial configuration, it is recommended that you set the 129.9.255.255 network segment as Search Domain. l Search for NE: It is recommended that you select Create NE after search and Upload after being created. By default, NE User is root and Password is password. l Connection Mode: This parameter specifies the connection mode between the U2000 and the gateway NE. For SSL connection, set this parameter to Security SSL.

2

8.2.2.1 Uploading the NE Data

Optional. Skip this operation task if you select Upload after being created during 8.2.1.1 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


7-29



Setting NE Attributes Table 7-6 Procedure for setting NE attributes Stage

Operation

Description

1

8.2.1.4 Changing the NE ID

Required. Set the parameters as follows:

8.2.1.5 Changing the NE Name

Optional.

2

l Set New ID to the value specified in the DCN plan. l If an extended ID is required for the NE ID specified in the DCN plan, change New Extended ID accordingly.

Configuring Logical Boards Table 7-7 Procedure for configuring logical boards

7-30

Stage

Operation

Description

1

8.2.1.3 Configuring the Logical Board

Required.


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



Configuring HWECC Table 7-8 Procedure for setting NE communications parameters Stage

Operation

Description

1

8.2.6.1 Setting NE Communica tion Parameters

Required. Set the parameters as follows: l For a gateway NE, set IP Address and Subnet Mask according to the external DCN plan. l For a gateway NE, if the external DCN requests a default gateway, set . l Generally, it is recommended that you set Connection Mode to Common+Security SSL. If the gateway NE needs to allow for NMS access only in SSL connection mode, set Connection Mode to Security SSL. l For non-gateway NEs, it is recommended that you set IP Address to 0x81000000 + NE ID. That is, if the NE ID is 0x090001, set IP Address to 129.9.0.1. Set Subnet Mask to 255.255.0.0. NOTE If the IP address of a non-gateway NE is never manually changed, its IP address changes by following the rule 0x81000000 + NE ID. In this case, the IP address of a non-gateway NE does not need to be manually changed.

Table 7-9 Procedure for configuring DCCs Stage

Operation

Description

1

8.2.6.2 Configuring DCCs

Optional. For all used microwave ports:

8.2.6.8 Configuring the Enable Status of the Inband DCN Function on Ports

Required.

2

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)

l Enabled/Disabled takes its default value Enabled. l Protocol Type takes its default value HWECC.

To save service bandwidths, set Enabled Status of all used microwave interfaces and FE/GE ports to Disabled.


7-31



Table 7-10 Procedure for configuring extended ECC Stage

Operation

Description

1

8.2.6.3 Configuring Extended ECC Communica tion

Required when an NE uses its Ethernet network management port or NE cascading port for connection. Set the parameters as follows: l Set ECC Extended Mode to Specified mode. l The other parameters take their default values. NOTE The operations in 8.2.6.3 Configuring Extended ECC Communication are performed to disable the automatic extended ECC function on the NE.

Table 7-11 Procedure for querying ECC routes Stage

Operation

Description

1

8.2.6.10 Querying ECC Routes

Generally, ECC routes between a gateway NE and its nongateway NEs comply with the network plan and communication between NEs is normal.

Configuring the IP over DCC Solution or Inband DCN Solution Table 7-12 Procedure for setting NE communications parameters Stage

Operation

Description

1

8.2.6.1 Setting NE Communica tion Parameters

Required. Set the parameters as follows: l For the gateway NE, set IP Address and Subnet Mask according to the external DCN plan. l For a gateway NE, if the external DCN requests a default gateway, set according to the network plan. l For non-gateway NEs, set IP Address according to the network plan. NOTE If the IP address of a non-gateway NE is never manually changed, its IP address changes by following the rule 0x81000000 + NE ID. In this case, the IP address of a non-gateway NE does not need to be manually changed.

7-32


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



Table 7-13 Procedure for configuring the IP over DCC solution Stage

Operation

Description

1


Required.


Required.

8.2.6.6 Enabling the Proxy ARP

Optional.

4

8.2.6.5 Setting OSPF Protocol Parameters

Optional. Set the Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) protocol parameters according to the network plan.

5

8.2.6.4 Creating Static IP Routes

Optional. Configure the static routes of NEs according to the network plan.

2

3

For all IF ports that are being used, set Enabled/Disabled to Enabled and set Protocol Type to TCP/IP.

For all IF and FE/GE ports, set Enabled Status of the inband DCN to Disabled.

When the IP address of the gateway NE is on the same network segment as that of the non-gateway NE, you can enable the proxy ARP function on the gateway NE.

Table 7-14 Procedure for configuring the inband DCN solution Stage

Operation

Description

1


Optional.

8.2.6.7 Configuring the VLAN ID and Bandwidth Used by an Inband DCN

Perform the operations in 8.2.6.7 Configuring the VLAN ID and Bandwidth Used by an Inband DCN when the OptiX RTN NE is connected to packet switching equipment and the packet switching equipment uses the inband DCN solution but does not use the default VLAN ID (4094) or bandwidth (512 kbit/s) planned for the inband DCN.

2

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)

Disable the DCCs over the IF ports if only the inband DCC solution is used on the network.


7-33



Stage

Operation

Description

3


Required. Set the parameters as follows.

8.2.6.12 Configuring Access Control

Required when the gateway NE needs to communicate with the NMS through an Ethernet service port. Set the parameters as follows:

4

For Ethernet ports and IF ports that an OptiX RTN NE uses for inband DCN communication with another OptiX RTN NE or packet switching equipment, set Enabled Status to Enabled. For other ports, set Enabled Status to Disabled.

l For the Ethernet service port, set Enabled Status to Enabled. In addition, set IP Address and Subnet Mask to their planned values. l Set IP Address of the Ethernet service port on a different network segment from that of the local NE.

Table 7-15 Procedure for configuring extended ECC communication Stage

Operation

Description

1

8.2.6.3 Configuring Extended ECC Communica tion

Required when an NE uses its Ethernet network management port or NE cascading port for connection. Set the parameters as follows: l Set ECC Extended Mode to Specified mode. l The other parameters take their default values. NOTE The operations in 8.2.6.3 Configuring Extended ECC Communication are performed to disable the automatic extended ECC function on the NE.

Table 7-16 Procedure for querying IP routes Stage

Operation

Description

1

8.2.6.11 Querying IP Routes

In general: l A gateway NE has correct routes to other NEs or network segments to which the other NEs belong. l A gateway NE has correct routes to the NMS or the network segment to which the NMS belongs.

7-34


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



Synchronizing the NE time Table 7-17 Procedure for synchronizing the NE time Stage

Operation

1

Synchroni zing the NE time

Description 8.2.1.6 Synchron izing the NE Time

Required. l To synchronize the NEs with the U2000 server, set the parameters as follows: – Set Synchronous Mode to NM. – Right-click and choose the operations from the shortcut menu for the NEs to be immediately synchronized with the U2000 server time. – Set the automatic synchronization parameters as required. It is recommended that the automatic synchronization parameters take their default values. l To synchronize the NEs with the NTP server, set the parameters as follows: – Set Synchronous Mode to Standard NTP. – Set Standard NTP Authentication according to the requirements of the NTP server. – It is recommended that you set the upper-level NTP server that the NEs trace, as follows: – For a gateway NE, set the external NTP server as the upper-level NTP server. Set Standard NTP Server Identifier to NE IP and set Standard NTP Server to the IP address of the external NTP server. – For a non-gateway NE, set the gateway NE as the upper-level NTP server. If the non-gateway NE needs to communicate with the gateway NE through the HWECC protocol, set Standard NTP Server Identifier to NE ID and set Standard NTP Server to the NE ID of the gateway NE. If the non-gateway NE needs to communicate with the gateway NE through the IP protocol, set Standard NTP Server Identifier to NE IP and set Standard NTP Server Identifier to the IP address of the gateway NE. – Set Standard NTP Server Key according to the requirements of the NTP server.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


7-35



Stage

Operation

Description 8.2.1.7 Localizin g the NE Time

Required if the DST scheme for the local area is used.

8.2.1.8 Configuri ng Standard NTP Keys

Required if the standard NTP authentication is used to synchronize the NEs with the NTP server.

Set the parameters according to the DST settings for the local area.

Set the parameters according to the identification authentication of the NTP server.

Setting the Performance Monitoring Status Table 7-18 Procedure for setting the performance monitoring status Stage

Operation

Description

1

8.2.3 Configuring the Performanc e Monitoring Status of NEs

If the 15-minute and 24-hour performance monitoring functions are set to Disabled, enable these performance monitoring functions.

Creating Fibers/Cables and Subnets Table 7-19 Procedures for creating fibers/cables and subnets 1

2

7-36

Creating fibers/ cables

8.2.4.1 Creating Optical Fibers by Using the Search Method

It is recommended that you perform this operation to create microwave links when the physical microwave links exist.

8.2.4.2 Creating Fibers Manually

It is recommended that you perform this operation to create links, such as Ethernet links, which cannot be created by searching for the links.

8.2.4.3 Creating an Extended ECC

Optional when NEs are connected through extended ECC channels.


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



3

8.2.4.4 Creating a Back-to-Back Radio Connection

Optional when there are cascading NEs on the network.

4

Configuri ng the subnet

8.2.5.1 Creating a Subnet

Optional.

8.2.5.2 Copying Topology Objects

Optional.

8.2.5.3 Moving Topology Objects

Optional.

7.2.2 Configuration Procedure (Radio Link) The configuration procedure varies according to the IP radio link configuration mode. Figure 7-19 shows the procedure for configuring IP radio links. Figure 7-19 Configuration flowchart (IP radio links) Required

Optional

Procedure for configuring IP radio links (XPIC enabled)

Procedure for configuring IP radio links (XPIC disabled)

Start

Start

Create an XPIC workgroup.

Create an IF 1+1 protection group.

Set the power to be received for the ODUs in an XPIC workgroup.

Configure the IF/ODU information of a radio link.

Set AM attributes of an XPIC workgroup.

Configure the ATPC function.

Create an IF 1+1 protection group.

End

End

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


7-37



The procedures in the configuration flowchart are described as follows.

Configuring an IP radio Link (XPIC Enabled) Table 7-20 Procedure for configuring an IP radio link (XPIC enabled) Stage

Operation

Description

1

8.3.2 Creating an XPIC Workgroup

Required.

8.3.3 Configuring the Power to Be Received for the ODUs in an XPIC Workgroup

Required.

8.3.4 Setting the AM Attributes of the XPIC Workgroup


2

3

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the parameters according to the network plan. Configure the same power to be received for the ODUs in the horizontally and vertically polarized directions of the XPIC workgroup.

l Set AM Status according to the network plan. l When the AM function is enabled on the radio links, set Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity and Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity according to the network plan. l When the AM function is disabled on the radio links, set Manually Specified Modulation Mode according to the network plan. l During site commissioning, set AM Status to Disabled and set Manually Specified Modulation Mode to Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity that is planned.


4

Required if two XPIC workgroups need to form two 1+1 protection groups. Set the related parameters according to the network plan. NOTE One XPIC workgroup cannot form a 1+1 protection group. The horizontally and vertically polarized radio links of one XPIC workgroup, however, can form two 1+1 protection groups with the horizontally and vertically polarized radio links of another XPIC workgroup.

NOTE

The MW_CFG_MISMATCH alarm is reported if the AM enabled status, modulation mode, and IF bandwidth are set inconsistently at both ends of an IP radio link.

7-38


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



Configuring an IP radio Link (XPIC Disabled) Table 7-21 Procedure for configuring an IP radio link (XPIC disabled) Stage

Operation

Description

1


Required if a radio link is configured with 1+1 protection.



2


l Set Link ID according to the network plan. l Set AM Status and IF Channel Bandwidth according to the network plan. l When the AM function is enabled on the radio links, set Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity and Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity according to the network plan. l When the AM function is disabled on the radio links, set Manually Specified Modulation Mode according to the network plan. l During site commissioning, set AM Status to Disabled and set Manually Specified Modulation Mode to Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity that is planned. l Set TX Frequency(MHz), T/R Spacing(MHz), and TX Power(dBm) according to the network plan. l Set TX Status to unmute. l Set Power to Be Received(dBm) according to the network plan. NOTE For radio links that use 1+1 HSB/SD configuration, you need to configure only the IF and ODU information for the working radio link. For radio links that use 1+1 FD configuration, you need to configure the IF and ODU information for the working radio link and the ODU information for the protection radio link.

3

8.4.3.2 Configuring ATPC Attributes

Required if the ATPC function needs to be used. l If the ATPC function needs to be used, set ATPC Enable Status to Enabled. l During site commissioning, set ATPC Enable Status to Disabled. l It is recommended that you set ATPC Upper Threshold (dBm) to the central value plus 10 dB. l It is recommended that you set ATPC Lower Threshold (dBm) to the central value minus 10 dB. l It is recommended that you set ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status to Disabled.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


7-39



NOTE

The MW_CFG_MISMATCH alarm is reported if the AM enabled status, modulation mode, and IF bandwidth are set inconsistently at both ends of an IP radio link.

7.2.3 Configuration Procedure (IEEE 802.1q Bridge-Based E-LAN Services) Configuring IEEE 802.1q bridge-based services includes configuring the service information, port information, protection information, and QoS information, and verifying the service configurations.

Configuration Flowchart Figure 7-20 shows the configuration flowchart of IEEE 802.1q bridge-based E-LAN services. Figure 7-20 Configuration flowchart (IEEE 802.1q bridge-based E-LAN services) Required

Start

Optional Configure Ethernet ports.

Configure IF_ETH ports.

Configure LAGs.

Configure ERPS protection.

Configure E-LAN services

Configure QoS

Verify Ethernet service configurations.

End

7-40


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



NOTE

On the NMS, an IF_ETH port is displayed as Microwave Interface. An IF_ETH port is an internal GE port on a generic IF board or an XPIC IF board. Ethernet packets are transmitted to the local IF board through its IF_ETH ports, and then mapped into microwave frames in IP radio mode. Ethernet packets demapped from microwave frames in IP radio mode are transmitted to the packet switching unit through IF_ETH ports. Internal IF_ETH port and external IF ports have one-to-one mappings. Therefore, an internal IF_ETH port, similar to an external IF port, can be regarded as a port connected to the packet plane.

The procedures in the configuration flowchart are described as follows.

Configuring Ethernet Ports Table 7-22 Procedure for configuring Ethernet ports Operation

Description

8.4.1.1 Setting the Basic Attributes of Ethernet Ports

Required. Set the parameters as follows: l For used ports, set Enable Port to Enabled. For unused ports, set Enable Port to Disabled. l Set Port Mode to Layer 2 and set Encapsulation Type to 802.1Q. l For an Ethernet port that is connected to external equipment, set Working Mode to the same value as that of the external equipment (generally, the working mode of the external equipment is autonegotiation). For Ethernet ports for connection within the network, set Working Mode to Auto-Negotiation. l It is recommended that you plan Max Frame Length(byte) to 1536 so that Ethernet frames with more than one tag, for example QinQ frames, can be transmitted. If jumbo frames need to be transmitted, you need to change the value of Max Frame Length(byte) according to the size of jumbo frames. Generally, if an OptiX RTN NE is interconnected with a BTS, Max Frame Length(byte) can also take its default value of 1522.

8.4.1.3 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes of Ethernet Ports

Required. Set the parameters as follows: l If all the received services carry VLAN tags (tagged frames), set TAG to Tag Aware. l If none of the received services carries VLAN tags (untagged frames), set TAG to Access, and set Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority according to the network plan. l If the received services contain both tagged frames and untagged frames, set TAG to Hybrid, and set Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority according to the network plan.

8.4.1.4 Setting the Advanced Attributes of Ethernet Ports

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)

Required when you need to enable the port self-loop test and automatic loopback shutdown functions or to enable the broadcast packet suppression function. Set Loopback Check, Loopback Port Shutdown, Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold, and Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression according to the actual requirements.


7-41



Configuring IF_ETH Ports Table 7-23 Procedure for configuring IF_ETH ports Operation

Description

8.4.2.1 Setting the Basic Attributes of IF_ETH Ports

Required.

8.4.2.2 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes of IF_ETH Ports


Set Encapsulation Type to 802.1Q.

l If all the received services carry VLAN tags (tagged frames), set Tag to Tag Aware. l If none of the received services carries VLAN tags (untagged frames), set Tag to Access, and set Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority according to the network plan. l If the received services contain both tagged frames and untagged frames, set TAG to Hybrid, and set Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority according to the network plan.

8.4.2.3 Setting the Advanced Attributes of IF_ETH Ports

Optional. If the IF_ETH port transmits an Ethernet service that permits bit errors, such as a voice service or a video service, set Error Frame Discard Enabled to Disabled. NOTE l For the ISU2/ISX2, it is recommended that you set Speed Transmission at L2 and Speed Transmission at L3 to Enabled, if the corresponding permission to enable the two functions is already obtained. l When Speed Transmission at L3 is set to Enabled, Encapsulation Type of the ISU2 and ISX2 boards cannot be set to Null. l Set Speed Transmission at L2 and Speed Transmission at L3 consistently for both ends of a radio link.

Procedures for Configuring ERPS Protection Table 7-24 Procedures for configuring ERPS protection

7-42

Operation

Description

8.5.2.1 Creating Ethernet Ring Protection Instances

Required when an Ethernet ring needs to be protected and service loops need to be avoided on the Ethernet ring.


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


Operation

Description

8.5.2.2 Setting the Parameters of Ethernet Ring Protocol

Required if the values of the default parameters of the ERPS timers need to be changed. Set Hold-Off Time(ms), Guard Time(ms), WTR Time(mm:ss), and Packet Transmit Interval(s) according to the actual requirements. Set these parameters to the same values for all the NEs on the network.


7-43



Procedures for Configuring a LAG Table 7-25 Procedures for configuring a LAG Operation

Description

8.5.1.1 Creating a LAG

Required if LAG protection is configured for FE/GE ports or for the IP radio that works in N+0/XPIC mode. Set the parameters as follows: l Set LAG Type to the same value as that at the opposite end. Generally, set LAG Type to Static at both ends. l Set the Hybrid/AM attributes to the same values for the IF ports in a LAG. l For FE/GE ports, set Load Balancing to the same value as that at the opposite end. It is recommended that you set Load Balancing to NonSharing at both ends, if the LAG is configured only to provide protection. It is recommended that you set Load Balancing to Sharing at both ends, if the LAG is configured to increase the bandwidth. l Set Load Balancing to Sharing at both ends, if IP radio works in N +0/XPIC mode and uses LAG protection. l Set Revertive Mode to the same value as that at the opposite end. Generally, set Revertive Mode to Revertive at both ends. This parameter is valid only to LAGs whose Load Balancing is set to NonSharing. l Set Load Balancing Hash Algorithm to the same value as that at the opposite end. Unless otherwise specified, this parameter takes the default value. This parameter is valid only to LAGs whose Load Balancing is set to Sharing. l It is recommended that the main and slave ports take the same settings at both ends. In this case, you can set LAG Priority as required. It is recommended that this parameter take its default value. This parameter is valid only to static LAGs. l For an air interface LAG, to enable microwave signal degrade to trigger LAG switching, set Switch LAG upon Air Interface SD to Enabled. l Set Main Board, Main Port, and Selected Standby Ports according to the network plan. It is recommended that the same main and slave ports are used for the LAGs at both ends. NOTE A LAG cannot be created on the members of an XPIC workgroup with 1+1 protection.

8.5.1.2 Setting LAG Parameters

7-44

Required if the non-sharing LAG has multiple slave ports and the sequence in which the slave pots take over needs to be specified. Set Port Priority to a smaller value for the slave port that first takes over for protection. Set Port Priority to larger values for the other slave ports. The highest value indicates the last slave port to take over.


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



Configuring IEEE 802.1q Bridge-Based E-LAN Services Table 7-26 Procedure for configuring IEEE 802.1q bridge-based E-LAN services Operation

Description

8.5.3.2 Configuring IEEE 802.1q Bridge-Based ELAN Services

Required. Set the parameters as follows: l Set Tag Type to C-Awared. l Set Self-Learning MAC Address to Enabled. l In the UNI tab page, set related parameters according to the network plan. l To disable packet forwarding between certain E-LAN service ports, add the ports to Split Horizon Group.

Managing the MAC address table

8.5.4.2 Creating a Blacklist Entry of MAC Addresses

Required when you need to disable NEs with specific MAC addresses from using E-LAN services.

8.5.4.1 Creating a Static MAC Address Entry

Required if you request specific MAC address entries not to age.

8.5.4.3 Configuring the Aging Parameters of a MAC Address Table

Required if you need to disable the aging function or change the aging time (5 minutes by default).

8.5.5 Setting the Mode for Processing an Unknown Frame of the E-LAN Service

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)




Optional.


7-45



Procedures for Configuring QoS Table 7-27 Procedures for configuring QoS

7-46

Operation

Description

8.5.6.2 Modifying the Mapping Relationships for the DS Domain

Required if the default mappings for the DS domain are inapplicable.

8.5.6.3 Changing the Ports Applied to a DS Domain and Their Trusted Packet Types

Required if the trusted packet type of the port is different from the default trusted packet type (C-VLAN priority) applied to the DS domain.

8.5.6.1 Creating a DS Domain

Required if you need to create more than one DS domain.

8.5.6.4 Creating a Port Policy

Required if you need to apply QoS policies other than DS and port shaping for a specific port.

8.5.6.6 Creating Traffic

Required if you need to perform the ACL, CoS, CAR or shaping operation for a specific flow over the port.

8.5.6.7 Setting the Port That Uses the Port Policy

Required if a port policy is created.

8.5.6.8 Configuring Port Shaping

Required if you need to limit the egress bandwidth that an Ethernet service occupies.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan. You can learn the default mappings for the DS domain by referring to 8.5.6.10 Querying the DS Domain of a Port.








Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



Procedures for Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations Table 7-28 Procedures for verifying Ethernet service configurations Operation

Description

8.5.7.1 Creating an MD

Required for the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in the service test are located. Set the parameters as follows: l Set Maintenance Domain Name and Maintenance Domain Level to the same values for the NEs. l For an Ethernet service between two edge nodes on the transport network, it is recommended that Maintenance Domain Level takes its default value of 4. For an Ethernet service between two internal NEs on the transport network, set Maintenance Domain Level to a value smaller than 4. For an Ethernet service between two Ethernet ports on the same NE, set Maintenance Domain Level to a value smaller than the value that is set in the test of an Ethernet service between two internal NEs on the transport network. Required for the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in the service test are located. Set the parameters as follows:

8.5.7.2 Creating an MA

l Set Maintenance Domain Name to the value of Maintenance Domain Name that is set in the preceding step. l Set Maintenance Association Name to the same value for the NEs. l Set Relevant Service to the same service for the NEs. l It is recommended that you set CC Test Transmit Period to 1s. Required for the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in the service test are located. Set the parameters as follows:

8.5.7.3 Creating MEPs

l Set Maintenance Association Name to the value of Maintenance Association Name that is set in the preceding step. l Set Board and Port to the Ethernet ports that are involved in the service test. l Set MP ID to different values for MEPs in the same MD. l If the OAM information initiated by the MEP travels through the packet switching unit on the local NE, set Direction of the MEP to Ingress. Otherwise, set Direction to Egress. l Set CC Status to Active, as the MEP ID is used to identify the MEP during the LB test.

8.5.7.4 Creating Remote MEPs in an MA

Required for the NE where the Ethernet ports involved in the OAM operation are located. Set the parameters as follows: l Set Maintenance Domain Name to the value of Maintenance Domain Name that is set in the preceding step. l Set Maintenance Association Name to the value of Maintenance Association Name that is set in the preceding step. l To ensure that an MEP can respond to the OAM operations initiated by the other MEPs in the same MA, you need to set the other MEPs as the remote MEPs.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


7-47



Operation

Description

Perform an LB test to test the Ethernet service configurations

Required. The LB test result should show that no packet loss occurs.

7.2.4 Configuration Procedure (Clocks) Configuring clocks includes configuring clock sources, clock protection, and output clocks. Figure 7-21 shows the procedure for configuring clocks. Figure 7-21 Configuration flowchart (clocks) Required

Start

Optional Configure clock sources.

Configure SSM or extended SSM protection.

Query the clock synchronization status.

End

The procedures in the configuration flowchart are described as follows. Table 7-29 Procedure for configuring clocks

7-48

Stage

Operation

Description

1

8.6.1 Configuring the Clock Sources

Required. Set the parameters as follows: Set Clock Source according to the network plan.


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



Stage

Operation

Description

2

Configu ring SSM or extende d SSM protecti on

Required if SSM or extended SSM protection is used. Set the parameters as follows:

8.6.2 Configuring Clock Subnets

l Set Protection Status based on the used protocol type. l If extended SSM protection is used, allocate Clock Source ID for the following clock sources: – Internal clock source of the NE that connects two intersecting ring and chain or connects two intersecting rings – Line clock source that enters a ring through its intersecting node when an intra-ring line clock source is configured, regardless of whether the ring intersects with another ring or with a chain The values of Clock Source ID for these clock sources must be different.

3

8.6.4 Configuring the SSM Output Status

Required if extended SSM protection is used.

8.6.5 Configuring the Clock ID Output Status

Required if SSM or extended SSM protection is used. Set the parameters as follows:

8.6.3 UserDefined Clock Quality

Optional.

8.6.7 Querying the Clock Synchronization Status

When a local line port is connected to an NE on the same clock subnet, set Control Status to Enabled.

When a local line port is connected to an NE on the same clock subnet, set Output Clock ID to Enabled. In other cases, set Output Clock ID to Disabled.

l When a clock subnet uses an NE internal clock source as its reference clock, set NE Clock Mode to Free-Run Mode for this NE; set NE Clock Mode to Normal Mode for the other NEs. l When a clock subnet uses a clock out of the subnet as its reference clock, set NE Clock Mode to Normal Mode for all the NEs.

7.3 Configuration Example (Networkwide Data Services) This section describes how to configure data services on an IP radio ring network according to the network plan. Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


7-49



7.3.1 Network Diagram The section describes the networking information about the NEs. 7.3.2 Service Planning (Network) The service planning information contains the information about all the parameters required for configuring the NE data. 7.3.3 Service Planning (Radio Links) This section describes the service planning information about all the parameters required for configuring radio links. 7.3.4 Service Planning (Ethernet Ports) The service planning information contains the information about all the parameters required for configuring Ethernet ports and IF_ETH ports. 7.3.5 Service Planning (Ethernet Protection) The service planning information contains the information about all the parameters required for configuring Ethernet protection. 7.3.6 Service Planning (Ethernet Services) The service planning information contains the information about all the parameters required for configuring Ethernet services. 7.3.7 Service Planning (QoS Information) The service planning information contains the information about all the parameters required for configuring QoS. 7.3.8 Service Planning (Clocks) The service planning information contains all the parameters required for configuring clocks. 7.3.9 Configuration Process (Network) This section describes the procedures for configuring a network. 7.3.10 Configuration Process (Radio Links) This section describes how to configure radio links. 7.3.11 Configuration Process (Ethernet Ports) 7.3.12 Configuration Process (Ethernet Protection) 7.3.13 Configuration Process (Ethernet Services) This section describes how to configure Ethernet services. 7.3.14 Configuration Process (QoS) 7.3.15 Configuration Process (Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations) This section describes how to verify Ethernet service configurations. 7.3.16 Configuration Process (Clocks) This section describes how to configure clocks.

7.3.1 Network Diagram The section describes the networking information about the NEs. Figure 7-22 shows the topology of the IP radio network that is used in this configuration example. The IP radio ring network needs to backhaul services from BTSs/NodeBs to the BSC and has the following service requirements:

7-50


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



l

All the radio links use 1+0 non-protection configuration.

l

The AM function is enabled for each radio link.

l

Ethernet services are transmitted from each BTS/NodeB. The Ethernet service capacity of each BTS is provided in Table 7-30. Table 7-30 Ethernet service capacity of each BTS/NodeB BTS/NodeB

BTS1

BTS2

NodeB1

NodeB2

Capacity of high-priority Ethernet services (Mbit/ s)

30

15

15

30

Capacity of low-priority Ethernet services (Mbit/ s)

100

50

50

100

NOTE

High-priority services are services that request transmission guarantees. High-priority services are not discarded in AM shifts. Low-priority services are services that do not request transmission guarantees. Low-priority services may be discarded in AM shifts.

l

LAG is configured to protect the two GE links between NE1 and the BSC.

l

ERPS is configured to protect Native Ethernet services on the IP radio ring network.

l

Services from BTSs/NodeBs do not carry VLAN IDs. After receiving services from BTSs/ NodeBs, the IP radio ring network adds a VLAN ID of 100 to the services from BTSs and adds a VLAN ID of 200 to the services from NodeBs.

l

Ethernet services from the BSC carry a VLAN ID of 100 or 200. Before transmitting the services from the BSC to BTSs/NodeBs, the IP radio ring network strips their VLAN IDs.

l

DSCP values are used to identify the priorities of the Ethernet services between the BTSs/ NodeBs and the BSC.

To meet the preceding requirements, configure IEEE 802.1q bridge-based E-LAN services on each NE, and implement corresponding LAG protection, ERPS protection, and QoS processing for services.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


7-51



Figure 7-22 Network diagram (network topology) NMC

Convergence network

LAN switch

GE

NE1 GE

BSC

FE

FE

BTS 1

NE4

NE2

FE

NodeB 2

FE NE3

BTS 2

NodeB 1

Figure 7-23 shows the board configuration of each NE on the radio network.

7-52


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



Figure 7-23 Network diagram (board configuration) Convergence network

NE1 CSH

BSC

GE

NE6 ISU2 EM6T

ISU2

NE2

NE4

CSH

CSH

NE6 ISU2 EM6T

NE6 ISU2 EM6T

ISU2

ISU2

FE BTS 1 FE

CSH NE6 ISU2 EM6T

NodeB 2

ISU2

NE3 FE

FE

BTS 2

NodeB 1

7.3.2 Service Planning (Network) The service planning information contains the information about all the parameters required for configuring the NE data. l

In this configuration example, the IP radio ring network is comprised of OptiX RTN equipment only, and therefore uses the HWECC solution. The HWECC information is planned as follows: – Network management information is transmitted to the IP radio ring network through NE1. Therefore, NE1 is planned as the gateway NE. – All NEs (NE1 to NE4) implement DCN communication based on the DCCs over the IP radio. – To save service bandwidths, the inband DCN function is disabled for all FE/GE ports and microwave ports on NE1 to NE4.

l

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)

Figure 7-24 shows the ID and IP address that are allocated to each NE according to the uniform DCN plan.


7-53



Figure 7-24 Allocated IDs and IP addresses (IP radio ring network) NMS 10.0.0.103/16 LAN switch 9-1 10.0.0.1 0.0.0.0

NE1

9-2 129.9.0.2 0.0.0.0

NE2

9-4 129.9.0.4 0.0.0.0

NE4

9-3 129.9.0.3 0.0.0.0

NE3 Extended ID-Basic ID IP address Gateway

NOTE

l The subnet mask for the IP address of each NE is 255.255.0.0. l The IP addresses of all the NEs, except NE1 (10.0.0.1), are interlocked with the NE IDs. If the IP address of an NE is never manually changed, the IP address is automatically changed to its planned value when the NE ID is changed.

l

NE1 is the gateway NE. Therefore, the automatic extended ECC function on NE1 needs to be disabled.

l

In this example, the policy of synchronizing the NE with the NM server is used. The automatic synchronization period is one day.

l

The daylight saving time (DST) scheme for the local area is used.

l

The 15-minute and 24-hour performance monitoring functions are enabled

7.3.3 Service Planning (Radio Links) This section describes the service planning information about all the parameters required for configuring radio links.

Basic Information About Radio Links The basic information about the radio links is planned based on the spectrum allocation on the radio network and the required radio transmission capacity. For details, see Table 7-31 and Figure 7-25. Table 7-31 Basic information about radio links

7-54

Parameter

Link 1

Link 2

Link 3

Link 4

Link ID

101

102

103

104

Tx high site

NE1

NE3

NE3

NE1


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



Parameter

Link 1

Link 2

Link 3

Link 4

Tx low site

NE2

NE2

NE4

NE4

Tx frequency at the Tx high site (MHz)

19270

19370

19270

19370

Tx frequency at the Tx low site (MHz)

17710

17810

17710

17810

T/R spacing (MHz)

1560

1560

1560

1560

Channel spacing (MHz)

50

50

50

50

RF configuration mode

1+0

1+0

1+0

1+0

Polarization direction

V (vertical polarization)

H (horizontal polarization)

V (vertical polarization)

H (horizontal polarization)

Figure 7-25 Basic information about radio links 101 19270M 17710M 50M 1+0 V-polarization

NE1

Tx high

NE2

104 19370M 17810M 50M 1+0 H-polarization

Tx high

Tx low

Tx low

Tx low

Tx low Tx high

102 19370M 17810M 50M 1+0 H-polarization

NE3

NE4

Tx high 103 19270M 17710M 50M 1+0 V-polarization

Link ID Tx high station Tx Freq. Tx low station Tx Freq. Channel spacing RF configuarion Polarization

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


7-55


7 Configuring Networkwide Service Data NOTE

This example does not provide the planning information (except for the polarization direction) that is not related to the IDU configuration.

Hybrid/AM Attribute Information Based on the capacity of Ethernet services and the availability requirement, you can compute the Hybrid/AM attribute information, as provided in Table 7-32. Table 7-32 Hybrid/AM attribute information Parameter

Link 1

Link 2

Link 3

Link 4

Capacity of high-priority Ethernet services (Mbit/ s)

90

90

90

90

Capacity of lowpriority Ethernet services (Mbit/ s)

300

300

300

300

AM enabling

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Modulation mode of the guaranteed AM capacity

QPSK

QPSK

QPSK

QPSK

Modulation mode of the full AM capacity

256QAM

256QAM

256QAM

256QAM

NOTE

The IP radio capacity and the AM function require an appropriate license file.

Power and ATPC Information By using radio network planning software such as Pathloss, you can analyze and compute various parameters of the radio links. The power and ATPC information about the radio links is provided in Table 7-33. Table 7-33 Power and ATPC information

7-56

Parameter

Link 1

Link 2

Link 3

Link 4

Transmit power (dBm)

16.5 (NE1)

15.5 (NE3)

16 (NE3)

15 (NE1)

16.5 (NE2)

15.5 (NE2)

16 (NE4)

15 (NE4)


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



Parameter

Link 1

Link 2

Link 3

Link 4

Receive power (dBm)

-42 (NE1)

-44 (NE3)

-43 (NE3)

-45 (NE1)

-42 (NE2)

-44 (NE2)

-43 (NE4)

-45 (NE4)

ATPC enabling

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

ATPC automatic threshold enabling

-

-

-

-

Upper threshold of ATPC adjustment (dBm)

-

-

-

-

Lower threshold of ATPC adjustment (dBm)

-

-

-

-

Maximum transmit power (dBm)

-

-

-

-

NOTE

l The transmit power is computed in modulation mode of the guaranteed AM capacity. l The receive power is computed in modulation mode of the guaranteed AM capacity. l In this example, the ATPC function is disabled.

IF Board Information Table 7-34 provides the information about IF boards, which is obtained based on rules for planning the radio type, slot priority, and 1+0 non-protection configuration. Table 7-34 IF board information

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)

Parameter

Link 1

Link 2

Link 3

Link 4

Main IF board

4-ISU2 (NE1)

4-ISU2 (NE2)

4-ISU2 (NE3)

4-ISU2 (NE4)

3-ISU2 (NE2)

3-ISU2 (NE3)

3-ISU2 (NE4)

3-ISU2 (NE1)

Standby IF board

-

-

-

-

RF configuration mode

1+0

1+0

1+0

1+0

Revertive mode

-

-

-

-


7-57



Parameter

Link 1

Link 2

Link 3

Link 4

WTR time(s)

-

-

-

-

Reverse switching enabling

-

-

-

-

NOTE

In this example, the IP radio network uses 1+0 protection configuration. If 1+1 protection is required: l It is recommended that you configure the two IF boards that construct a 1+1 HSB protection group in slot 3 and slot 5, slot 4 and slot 6, or slot 1 and slot 2. In addition, it is recommended that you configure the main IF board in the slot with the smaller slot numbers. l It is recommended that you configure the two IF boards that construct a 1+1 FD/SD protection group in slot 3 and slot 5, slot 4 and slot 6, or slot 1 and slot 2. In addition, it is recommended that you configure the main IF board in the slot with the smaller slot numbers. l Generally, if 1+1 HSB protection is configured, it is recommended that the reverse switching function be disabled; if 1+1 SD protection is configured, it is recommended that the reverse switching function be enabled. l If there is no special requirement, it is recommended that the other parameters for configuring 1+1 HSB/ FD/SD protection take their default values.

7.3.4 Service Planning (Ethernet Ports) The service planning information contains the information about all the parameters required for configuring Ethernet ports and IF_ETH ports.

Ethernet Port Information Table 7-35 to Table 7-38 provide the information about the Ethernet ports that transmit the Ethernet services in this configuration example. Table 7-35 Ethernet port information (NE1) Parameter

7-58

Between NE1 and the BSC 1-EM6T-1

1-EM6T-2

Encapsulation type

802.1Q

802.1Q

Port working mode

Auto-negotiation

Auto-negotiation

Maximum frame length

1536

1536

Flow control

Disabled

Disabled

Tag attribute

Tag aware

Tag aware

Loopback detection

Enabled

Enabled

Loopback port shutdown

Disabled

Disabled


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


Parameter


Between NE1 and the BSC 1-EM6T-1

1-EM6T-2

Enabling broadcast packet suppression

Enabled

Enabled

Broadcast packet suppression threshold

30

30

Table 7-36 Ethernet port information (NE2) Parameter

Between BTS1 and NE2 1-EM6T-3

Encapsulation type

802.1Q

Port working mode

Auto-negotiation


1536

Flow control

Disabled

Tag attribute

Access

Default VLAN ID

100

VLAN priority

0 (default value)

Loopback detection

Enabled


Disabled


Enabled


30


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)

Between BTS2 and NE3

Between NodeB1 and NE3

1-EM6T-3

1-EM6T-4

Encapsulation type

802.1Q

802.1Q

Port working mode

Auto-negotiation

Auto-negotiation


1536

1536

Flow control

Disabled

Disabled

Tag attribute

Access

Access


7-59



Parameter

Between BTS2 and NE3

Between NodeB1 and NE3

1-EM6T-3

1-EM6T-4

Default VLAN ID

100

200

VLAN priority

0 (default value)

0 (default value)

Loopback detection

Enabled

Enabled


Disabled

Disabled


Enabled

Enabled


30

30


Between NodeB2 and NE4 1-EM6T-3

7-60

Encapsulation type

802.1Q

Port working mode

Auto-negotiation


1536

Flow control

Disabled

Tag attribute

Access

Default VLAN ID

200

VLAN priority

0 (default value)

Loopback detection

Enabled


Disabled


Enabled


30


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



NOTE

l In this example, the FE ports on all the BTSs work in auto-negotiation mode. Therefore, the FE/GE ports on each NE that receive and transmit services must also work in auto-negotiation mode. If the peer Ethernet port works in another mode, the local Ethernet port must work in the same mode. The working modes of the Ethernet ports inside the network are planned as auto-negotiation. l In this example, to ensure that the Ethernet frames that carry more than one tag such as QinQ can traverse the equipment, the maximum frame length is set to 1536 (bytes). If the equipment needs to transmit jumbo frames with a greater length, set the maximum frame length according to the actual length of a jumbo frame. Generally, if the equipment is directly interconnected with BTSs, the maximum frame length takes its default value (1522 bytes). l In this example, all the Ethernet services from the BSC carry VLAN IDs. Therefore, the tag attributes of all the ports on NE1 are tag aware. The Ethernet services from the BTSs/NodeBs do not carry VLAN IDs. Therefore, the tag attributes of all the ports on NE2 to NE4 are access.

IF_ETH Port Information Table 7-39 provides the information about the IF_ETH ports that carry the Ethernet services on NE1 to NE4. Table 7-39 IF_ETH port information (NE1 to NE4) Parameter

3-ISU2-1

4-ISU2-1

Encapsulation type

802.1Q

802.1Q

Tag attribute

Tag aware

Tag aware

Error frame discard enabled

Enabled

Enabled


Enabled

Enabled


30

30

NOTE

l In this example, all Native Ethernet services on the IP radio ring network carry VLAN IDs. Therefore, the tag attributes of all IF_ETH ports are tag aware. l The majority of the services that are backhauled from BTSs/NodeBs are Internet services. Therefore, the errored frame discarding function needs to be enabled.

7.3.5 Service Planning (Ethernet Protection) The service planning information contains the information about all the parameters required for configuring Ethernet protection.

LAG Information To improve the reliability of service transmission, NE1 and the BSC are interconnected through the LAG formed by two GE links. Table 7-40 provides the planning information.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


7-61



Table 7-40 LAG information Parameter

NE1

LAG No.

Automatically assigned

LAG name

LAG_01

LAG type

Static (default value)

Revertive mode

Revertive

Load sharing mode

Non-sharing (default value)

System priority

32768 (default value)

WTR time

10 minutes (default value)

Main port

1-EM6T-1

Slave port

1-EM6T-2

NOTE

In this example, the bandwidth of the Ethernet services is 390 Mbit/s, which is much lower than the bandwidth of a GE port. Therefore, you do not need to configure the LAG to the load-sharing mode for increasing the bandwidth.

Information about ERPS Instances Table 7-41 provides the information about ERPS instances. Table 7-41 Information about ERPS instances

7-62

Parameter

NE1

NE2

NE3

NE4

ERPS ID

1

1

1

1

East port

3-ISU2-1

3-ISU2-1

4-ISU2-1

3-ISU2-1

West port

4-ISU2-1

4-ISU2-1

3-ISU2-1

4-ISU2-1

RPL owner ring node flag

No

No

Yes

No

RPL port

-

-

4-ISU2-1

-

Control VLAN

4093

4093

4093

4093

Packet transmit interval

5s (default value)

5s (default value)

5s (default value)

5s (default value)

Maintenance entity level

4 (default value)

4 (default value)

4 (default value)

4 (default value)

WTR time

-

-

5 minutes (default value)

–


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



Parameter

NE1

NE2

NE3

NE4

Guard time

500 ms (default value)




Hold-off time

0s (default value)

0s (default value)

0s (default value)

0s (default value)

NOTE

l In this example, all the services are aggregated to NE1. Therefore, the NE (NE3) that is farthest from NE1 needs to function as the RPL owner. In this way, when the ring network is normal, the traffic carried on each link is relatively even. l The control VLAN needs to be a VLAN that is not used by any service. It is recommended that the control VLAN use VLAN 4093. l The packet transmit interval, entity level, WTR time, guard time, and hold-off time generally take their default values.

7.3.6 Service Planning (Ethernet Services) The service planning information contains the information about all the parameters required for configuring Ethernet services. Table 7-42 provides the service planning information. Table 7-42 Information about IEEE 802.1q bridge-based E-LAN services Parameter

NE1

NE2

NE3

NE4

Service ID

1

1

1

1

Service name

Qlan

Qlan

Qlan

Qlan

Tag type

C-Awared

C-Awared

C-Awared

C-Awared

Self-learning MAC address

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

MAC address learning mode

IVL

IVL

IVL

IVL

Mounted UNI port

1-EM6T-1 (VLAN ID:100, 200)

1-EM6T-3 (VLAN ID: 100)

1-EM6T-3 (VLAN ID: 100)

1-EM6T-3 (VLAN ID: 200)

3-ISU2-1 (VLAN ID: 100, 200)

3-ISU2-1 (VLAN ID: 100, 200)

1-EM6T-4 (VLAN ID: 200)

3-ISU2-1 (VLAN ID: 100, 200)

4-ISU2-1 (VLAN ID: 100, 200)

4-ISU2-1 (VLAN ID: 100, 200)

3-ISU2-1 (VLAN ID: 100, 200)

4-ISU2-1 (VLAN ID: 100, 200)

4-ISU2-1 (VLAN ID: 100, 200) Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


7-63



NOTE

In this example, no split horizon group is configured.

7.3.7 Service Planning (QoS Information) The service planning information contains the information about all the parameters required for configuring QoS.

QoS (DiffServ) DiffServ (DS) is the basis for QoS. It is recommended that the VLAN priority or DSCP value of the BTS services be allocated according to the service type. Then, the transmission network creates the corresponding DS domain according to the allocated VLAN priority or DSCP value. Each Ethernet port involved in the service must use the same DS configuration. In this example, the BTS services are allocated with corresponding DSCP values according to the service type, and the NEs allocate the PHB service classes according to the DSCP value, as shown in Table 7-43. Each Ethernet port involved in the service uses the same DS configuration. Table 7-43 Service type and PHB service class

7-64

PHB Service Class

DSCP

Corresponding Service Type

CS7

56

–

CS6

48

–

EF

40

Real-time voice service and signaling service (R99 conversational and R99 streaming services)

AF4

32

–

AF3

24

Real-time OM and HSDPA services (OM streaming and HSPA streaming services)

AF2

16

Non-real-time R99 service (R99 interactive and R99 background services)

AF1

8

–

BE

0

HSDPA data service (HSPA interactive and background services)


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



NOTE

l During the mapping of the PHB service class, CS7 or CS6 is not recommended, because CS7 or CS6 may be used to transmit Ethernet protocol packets or inband DCN packets on the NE. l Do not modify the default mappings for the DS domain because they already meet the network requirements. l Change the type of trusted packets for associated Ethernet ports in the default DS domain, because the Ethernet ports trust packets with DSCP values, instead of packets with C-VLAN priorities.

QoS (Queue Scheduling Policies) Generally, each Ethernet port involved in the service uses the same queue scheduling policy. Table 7-44 lists the queue scheduling policy used by each Ethernet port involved in the service in this example. Table 7-44 Queue scheduling policies PHB Service Class

Queue Scheduling Policy

CS7

SP

CS6

SP

EF

SP

AF4

SP

AF3

SP

AF2

SP

AF1

SP

BE

SP

QoS (CAR or Shaping for a Specified Service Flow) Generally, microwave backhaul networks do not require CAR or shaping because BTSs and BSCs already perform traffic control operations.

QoS (Port Shaping) If the Ethernet bandwidth planned for the aggregation link is lower than the total bandwidth of the aggregation services, you can perform port shaping at the edge node to limit the Ethernet service traffic that travels to the aggregation node, preventing congestion at the aggregation node. In this example, you do not need to perform port shaping.

7.3.8 Service Planning (Clocks) The service planning information contains all the parameters required for configuring clocks.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


7-65



Clock Source Information The IP radio ring network traces the internal clock source of NE1, as shown in Figure 7-26. Figure 7-26 Clock source information (IP radio ring network) NE1 Internal

SSM NE2

NE4 3-ISU2-1 /4-ISU2-1/ Internal


NE3 Clock

3-ISU2-1 /4-ISU2-1/ Internal

Clock Protection In this example, the standard SSM protocol is enabled for all NEs on the ring network.

Clock Synchronization Policy (NE1) In this example, NE1 uses its internal clock source, which is generated by its internal oscillator in free-run mode, and provides clock synchronization signals to the IP radio ring network.

Clock Synchronization Policy (NE2 to NE4) In this example, NE2 to NE4 extract reference clock information from the bit streams on radio links.

7.3.9 Configuration Process (Network) This section describes the procedures for configuring a network.

Notes

7-66

l

This section uses NE1 as an example to describe how to configure data for an NE on a network.

l

Skip the operation tasks in this section if the following tasks have been performed during NE commissioning: changing the NE ID and NE name, modifying NE communication parameters, and configuring logical boards and the DCN solution. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



Procedure Step 1 Follow the instructions in 8.2.1.1 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method. The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.

NOTE

In this configuration example, it is assumed that the IP address of the gateway NE has not been manually changed and that the IP addresses of the non-gateway NEs are not known. Therefore, you need to search for and create the NEs by using the 129.9.255.255 network segment as the search domain. If the IP address of the gateway NE is known, it is recommended that you use the IP address of the gateway NE as the search domain.

Normally, the icon of NE1 should be displayed on Main Topology and all the NE data should be uploaded successfully. Step 2 Follow the instructions in 8.2.1.4 Changing the NE ID. The values for the related parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.

Step 3 Follow the instructions in 8.2.1.3 Configuring the Logical Board. Configure the logical boards on NE1 according to the mappings between the physical boards and logical boards.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


7-67



Step 4 Follow the instructions in 8.2.6.2 Configuring DCCs. For NE1, all the parameters take their default values.

Step 5 Follow the instructions in 8.2.6.8 Configuring the Enable Status of the Inband DCN Function on Ports. Disable the inband DCN function for all unused FE/GE ports on NE1.

Disable the inband DCN function for all unused IF ports on NE1.

Step 6 Follow the instructions in 8.2.6.1 Setting NE Communication Parameters. The values for the related parameters of NE1 are provided as follows. 7-68


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



NOTE

The IP addresses of all the NEs, except NE1 (10.0.0.1), are interlocked with the NE IDs. If the IP address of an NE is never manually changed, the IP address is automatically changed to its planned value when the NE ID is changed.

Step 7 Follow the instructions in 8.2.6.3 Configuring Extended ECC Communication. The values for the related parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.

NOTE

NE1 is the gateway NE. Therefore, the automatic extended ECC function on NE1 needs to be disabled.

Step 8 Follow the instructions in 8.2.1.6 Synchronizing the NE Time. 1.

Ensure that Synchronization Period(days) is 1.

2.

Synchronize the NE time.

Step 9 Follow the instructions in 8.2.1.7 Localizing the NE Time. In this example, daylight saving time (DST) is used.

Step 10 Follow the instructions in 8.2.3 Configuring the Performance Monitoring Status of NEs. In this example, the 15-minute and 24-hour performance monitoring functions are enabled.

----End

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


7-69



7.3.10 Configuration Process (Radio Links) This section describes how to configure radio links.

Notes This section uses NE1 as an example to describe how to configure radio links on NEs.

Procedure Step 1 Follow the instructions in 8.3.5 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link. The values for the related parameters of NE1 are provided as follows. l IF parameters (3-ISU2):

l IF parameters (4-ISU2):

7-70


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



l ODU parameters (23-ODU):

l ODU parameters (24-ODU):

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


7-71



Step 2 Follow the instructions in 8.4.3.1 Setting IF Attributes. For 3-ISU2 and 4-ISU2 on NE1, set Enable IEEE-1588 Timeslot to Disabled.

Step 3 Follow the instructions in 8.4.3.2 Configuring ATPC Attributes. For 3-ISU2 and 4-ISU2 on NE1, set ATPC Enable Status to Disabled.

----End

7.3.11 Configuration Process (Ethernet Ports) Notes This section uses NE1 as an example to describe how to configure Ethernet ports on an NE.

Procedure Step 1 Follow the instructions in 8.4.1.1 Setting the Basic Attributes of Ethernet Ports. The values for the related parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.

NOTE

In this example, to ensure that the Ethernet frames that carry more than one tag such as QinQ can traverse the equipment, the maximum frame length is set to 1536 (bytes). If the equipment needs to transmit jumbo frames with a greater length, set the maximum frame length according to the actual length of a jumbo frame. Generally, if the equipment is directly interconnected with BTSs, the maximum frame length takes its default value (1522 bytes).

Step 2 Follow the instructions in 8.4.1.2 Configuring the Traffic Control of Ethernet Ports.

Step 3 8.4.1.3 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes of Ethernet Ports 7-72


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



Step 4 Follow the instructions in 8.4.2.1 Setting the Basic Attributes of IF_ETH Ports. The values for the related parameters of 3-ISU2-1 and 4-ISU2-1 on NE1 are provided as follows.

Step 5 Follow the instructions in 8.4.2.2 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes of IF_ETH Ports. The values for the related parameters of 3-ISU2-1 and 4-ISU2-1 on NE1 are provided as follows.

Step 6 Follow the instructions in 8.4.2.3 Setting the Advanced Attributes of IF_ETH Ports. The values for the related parameters of 3-ISU2-1 and 4-ISU2-1 on NE1 are provided as follows.

----End

7.3.12 Configuration Process (Ethernet Protection) Notes This section uses NE1 as an example to describe how to configure Ethernet protection on an NE.

Procedure Step 1 Follow the instructions in 8.5.1.1 Creating a LAG. The values for the related parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


7-73



Step 2 Follow the instructions in 8.5.2.1 Creating Ethernet Ring Protection Instances. The values for the related parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.

----End

7.3.13 Configuration Process (Ethernet Services) This section describes how to configure Ethernet services.

Notes This section uses NE1 as an example to describe how to configure Ethernet services on an NE. 7-74


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



Procedure Step 1 Follow the instructions in 8.5.3.2 Configuring IEEE 802.1q Bridge-Based E-LAN Services. The values for the related parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.

----End

7.3.14 Configuration Process (QoS) Notes This section uses NE1 as an example to describe how to configure QoS on an NE.

Procedure Step 1 Follow the instructions in 8.5.6.2 Modifying the Mapping Relationships for the DS Domain. NOTE

In this example, the default mappings for the DS domain are consistent with the network plan. Therefore, skip this step.

The values for the related parameters of NE1 are provided as follows. l Ingress Mapping Relation:

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


7-75



l Egress Mapping Relation:

7-76


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



Step 2 Follow the instructions in 8.5.6.3 Changing the Ports Applied to a DS Domain and Their Trusted Packet Types. NOTE

The desired trusted packet type is not the C-VLAN priority but the DSCP value. Therefore, the trusted packet type needs to be modified for service-associated Ethernet ports that are applied in the default DS domain.

The values for the related parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


7-77



Step 3 Follow the instructions in 8.5.6.4 Creating a Port Policy. The values for the related parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.

----End

7.3.15 Configuration Process (Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations) This section describes how to verify Ethernet service configurations.

Notes This section describes how to verify the Ethernet services on the link between BTS1 and the BSC. The process for verifying Ethernet services on other links is similar.

Procedure Step 1 Follow the instructions in 8.5.7.1 Creating an MD. NOTE

In this example, the default maintenance domain (MD) is used. Therefore, skip this step.

Step 2 Follow the instructions in 8.5.7.2 Creating an MA. The values for the related parameters of NE1 are provided as follows. 7-78


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



Step 3 Follow the instructions in 8.5.7.3 Creating MEPs. IEEE 802.1q bridge-based E-LAN service from the BSC to BTS1:

Step 4 Follow the instructions in 8.5.7.4 Creating Remote MEPs in an MA. IEEE 802.1q bridge-based E-LAN service from the BSC to BTS1:

Step 5 For NE2, refer to Step 1 to Step 4 and set the Ethernet OAM parameters. The values for the related parameters of the MD are provided as follows. Parameter

Value NE2

Maintenance Domain Name

default

Maintenance Domain Level

4

The values for the related parameters of the maintenance association (MA) are provided as follows. Parameter

Value NE2

Maintenance Domain Name Issue 02 (2011-05-20)

default


7-79


Parameter


Value NE2

Maintenance Association Name

EdgeNE

Relevant Service

1-Qlan

CC Test Transmit Period

1s

The values for the related parameters of maintenance points (MPs) are provided as follows. Parameter

Value NE2


default


EdgeNE

Board

1-EM6T

Port

1-EM6T-3

VLAN

100

MP ID

201

Direction

Ingress

CC Status

Active

The values for the related parameters of remote MPs are provided as follows. Parameter

Value NE2


default


EdgeNE

Remote Maintenance Point ID(e.g:1,3-6)

101

Step 6 Perform LB tests to verify the Ethernet services between the BSC and BTS1. Perform an LB test by considering the MEP whose MEP ID is 101 as the source MEP and the MEP whose MEP ID is 201 as the sink MEP. The test result should show that no packet loss occurs. ----End 7-80


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)



7.3.16 Configuration Process (Clocks) This section describes how to configure clocks.

Notes This section uses NE1 as an example to describe how to configure clocks on an NE.

Procedure Step 1 Follow the instructions in 8.6.1 Configuring the Clock Sources. The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.

Step 2 Follow the instructions in 8.6.2 Configuring Clock Subnets. In this example, the standard Synchronization Status Message (SSM) protocol is enabled for NE1 to NE4.

Step 3 Follow the instructions in 8.6.7 Querying the Clock Synchronization Status. For NE1 to NE4, set NE Clock Mode to Normal Mode.

----End

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


7-81


8 Task Collection

8

Task Collection

About This Chapter This section describes various tasks involved in this document. 8.1 U2000 Quick Start The U2000 quick start guide helps to learn about basic operations on the U2000 client. 8.2 Network Management Network management involves topology management, communication management, and security management. 8.3 Managing Radio Links Before you configure the radio link between two microwave sites, configure the information about the radio link. 8.4 Managing Ports Setting correct port parameter is the basis of configuring ports that transmit services. 8.5 Configuring Ethernet Services and Features on the Packet Plane Configurations of Ethernet services and features on the packet plane include Ethernet port, protection, service, protocol, and OAM configurations. 8.6 Managing the Clock To ensure the clock synchronization between transmission nodes on a transport network, you need to manage the NE clock.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8-1


8 Task Collection

8.1 U2000 Quick Start The U2000 quick start guide helps to learn about basic operations on the U2000 client. 8.1.1 Logging in to a U2000 Client The U2000 uses the client/server architecture and allows multiple clients; you can log in to the U2000 server by means of a U2000 client to manage OptiX RTN NEs. 8.1.2 Shutting Down a U2000 Client Shut down the U2000 client when it is not used any longer. 8.1.3 Using Online Help Online Help provides help information about the U2000. 8.1.4 Navigating to Common Views This section describes the main views on the U2000 and their functions.

8.1.1 Logging in to a U2000 Client The U2000 uses the client/server architecture and allows multiple clients; you can log in to the U2000 server by means of a U2000 client to manage OptiX RTN NEs.

Prerequisite l

The U2000 system has been started on the U2000 server.

l

The IP address of the U2000 client is in the access control list (ACL) configured in the U2000 system.

l

The U2000 client has proper communication with the U2000 server.


Procedure Step 1 Double-click the U2000 client icon on the desktop. Step 2 In the Login dialog box, set User Name and Password. Step 3 Select the desired U2000 server from the Server drop-down list.

Step 4 Click Login. 8-2


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8 Task Collection

You are logging in to the U2000 system. ----End

8.1.2 Shutting Down a U2000 Client Shut down the U2000 client when it is not used any longer.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.


Procedure Step 1 Choose File > Exit from the Main Menu. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Step 2 Click OK to shut down the U2000 client.

NOTE

If the main topology has changed but the changes have not been stored, a dialog box will be displayed asking whether to update the main topology. The U2000 client is shut down after you determine whether to update the main topology.

----End

8.1.3 Using Online Help Online Help provides help information about the U2000.


Procedure Step 1 Choose Help > Help Topics from the Main Menu. The Online Help page is displayed. Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8-3


8 Task Collection TIP

When using the U2000 client, press the F1 key to quickly display the related Online Help page.

----End

8.1.4 Navigating to Common Views This section describes the main views on the U2000 and their functions. 8.1.4.1 Navigating to the Main Topology The U2000 provides the Main Topology view to support network topology management. 8.1.4.2 Navigating to the NE Explorer The U2000 provides the NE Explorer view to support users' management on equipment. The NE Explorer view consists of the Function Tree pane, the Object Tree pane, and the configuration interface. 8.1.4.3 Navigating to the NE Panel NE Panel displays the boards configured on the NE. Different colors of the boards represent different board states.

8.1.4.1 Navigating to the Main Topology The U2000 provides the Main Topology view to support network topology management.



Procedure Step 1 Choose View > Main Topology from the Main Menu, or double-click the Main Topology icon in Workbench. The Main Topology view is displayed.

8-4


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8 Task Collection

Figure 8-1 Main topology Menu bar

Current view

Shortcut icon

NE statistics

Alarm panel

Main topology

Alarm button bar

Event button

Filter tree

TIP

To quickly navigate to the Main Topology view, click

.

----End

8.1.4.2 Navigating to the NE Explorer The U2000 provides the NE Explorer view to support users' management on equipment. The NE Explorer view consists of the Function Tree pane, the Object Tree pane, and the configuration interface.



Procedure Step 1 Optional: In Main Topology, double-click the subnet to which the NE belongs. Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8-5


8 Task Collection

Step 2 In Main Topology, right-click the icon of the desired NE and choose NE Explorer from the shortcut menu. The NE Explorer view is displayed. Figure 8-2 NE explorer Object Tree

Function Tree

Shortcut icon

Configuration interface

TIP

l To quickly navigate to NE Explorer, click

.

l To quickly navigate to the NE Panel view, click l To quickly navigate to Online Help, click

.

.

----End

8.1.4.3 Navigating to the NE Panel NE Panel displays the boards configured on the NE. Different colors of the boards represent different board states.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher. 8-6


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8 Task Collection


Procedure Step 1 Optional: In Main Topology, double-click the subnet to which the NE belongs. Step 2 Double-click the icon of the desired NE in Main Topology. NE Panel is displayed.

TIP

l To quickly navigate to the NE Explorer view, click l To quickly synchronize the NE time, click

.

.

----End

8.2 Network Management Network management involves topology management, communication management, and security management. 8.2.1 Managing NEs Before you configure NEs, ensure that the NEs can be managed on the NMS. 8.2.2 Configuring the NE Data If an NE is not configured after being created successfully, you need to configure the NE data so that the NMS can manage this NE. Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8-7


8 Task Collection

8.2.3 Configuring the Performance Monitoring Status of NEs By performing this operation task, you can manually enable or disable performance monitoring for NEs, or set the performance monitoring period. 8.2.4 Connecting Fibers or Cables To implement the end-to-end management on the NMS, you need to connect fibers or cables. 8.2.5 Managing Subnets To facilitate NE management, you can allocate the NEs that are in the same domain or have similar attributes into the same subnet. 8.2.6 Managing Communication To manage the NE by the NMS, ensure that the DCN communication is working properly. 8.2.7 Configuring Service Access of NEs You can ensure the security of a network by setting service access of the NEs on the network. 8.2.8 Configuring an NE User NE users refer to the users who log in to and operate NEs. Different types of NE users are assigned different rights to log in and manage NEs. 8.2.9 Configuring SSL Protocol Communication The security socket layer (SSL) protocol provides encrypted and reliable communication between entities. Therefore, SSL protocol communication greatly improves the network management security.

8.2.1 Managing NEs Before you configure NEs, ensure that the NEs can be managed on the NMS. 8.2.1.1 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method The U2000 can find all NEs that communicate with a specific gateway NE by using the IP address of the gateway NE, the IP address range of the gateway NE, or the NSAP addresses. In addition, the U2000 can create the NEs that are found in batches. Compared with the method of manually creating NEs, this method is faster and more reliable. 8.2.1.2 Creating NEs by Using the Manual Method You can only create NEs one by one by using the manual method. The manual method, unlike the search method, does not allow creating NEs in batches. 8.2.1.3 Configuring the Logical Board If the logical board corresponding to the physical board is not added in the slot layout, add the logical board in the slot layout. If the physical board is inconsistent with the logical board in the slot layout, delete the inconsistent logical board and add the correct logical board. 8.2.1.4 Changing the NE ID Change the NE ID according to the engineering plan to guarantee that each NE ID is unique. This operation task does not interrupt services. 8.2.1.5 Changing the NE Name To better identify the NE in the Main Topology, name the NE according to the NE geographical location or the device connected to the NE. 8.2.1.6 Synchronizing the NE Time By setting the NE time to be synchronous with the time on the NMS or standard NTP server, you can record the exact time when alarms and abnormal events occur. 8.2.1.7 Localizing the NE Time 8-8


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8 Task Collection

When the daylight saving time (DST) is used in the area where the NE is located, you need to localize the NE time to synchronize the NE time with the local time. 8.2.1.8 Configuring Standard NTP Keys When the NE time is synchronized with the time on the NTP server and the identity authentication is required, configure NTP keys.

8.2.1.1 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method The U2000 can find all NEs that communicate with a specific gateway NE by using the IP address of the gateway NE, the IP address range of the gateway NE, or the NSAP addresses. In addition, the U2000 can create the NEs that are found in batches. Compared with the method of manually creating NEs, this method is faster and more reliable.

Prerequisite l

The NMS must have proper communication with NEs.

l



Procedure Step 1 Choose File > Discovery > NE from the Main Menu. Step 2 Select Transport NE Search tab. Step 3 Select Search Mode. Step 4 Optional: If Search Mode is set to Search for NE, you need to add a search domain. 1.

Click Add, and then the Input Search Domain dialog box is displayed.

2.

Select an address type and enter the search address.

NOTE

l When Address Type is set to NSAP Address, ensure that the OSI protocol stack software is installed on the U2000. l When Address Type is set to IP Address of GNE or IP Address Range of GNE, and the U2000 server and gateway NE are not in the same network segment, ensure that the IP routes of the network segments to which the U2000 server and gateway NE belong are configured on the U2000 and related routers.

3. Issue 02 (2011-05-20)

Click OK. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-9


8 Task Collection

Step 5 Optional: Repeat Step 4 to add several search domains. Step 6 In the Search for NE dialog box, perform the operations described in the Note part. NOTE

l If Create NE after search is selected, you need to specify NE User and Password. l You can select either Create NE after search or Upload after Create or both Create NE after search and Upload after Create. In this manner, after the NE searching is complete, the system automatically creates an NE and uploads the NE.

Step 7 Click Next, and then the Transport NE Search dialog box is displayed. After the search is complete, all the NEs that are found are displayed in the Result list. Step 8 Create NEs. 1.

Select an NE that is not created from the Result list.

2.

Optional: Select the GNE ID of the NE.

3.

Click Create. The Create dialog box is displayed.

4.

Specify User Name and Password.

5.

Click OK. The icon of the created NE is displayed in the Main Topology.

Step 9 Optional: Repeat Step 8 to create other NEs that are not created. ----End

8.2.1.2 Creating NEs by Using the Manual Method You can only create NEs one by one by using the manual method. The manual method, unlike the search method, does not allow creating NEs in batches.

Prerequisite l


l

The NMS must have proper communication with the NE to be created.

l

If the NE to be created is a non-gateway NE, the gateway NE to which the NE to be created belongs must be created.

Procedure Step 1 Choose File > Discovery > NE from the Main Menu. The Create NE dialog box is displayed. Step 2 Choose RTN Series > OptiX RTN 950 from the Object Tree. Step 3 Enter the following information: ID, Extended ID, Name, and Remarks. Step 4 Set Gateway Type for the NE.

8-10

If...

Then...

The Gateway Type parameter is set to Gateway



Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


If...

8 Task Collection

Then...

The Gateway Type parameter is set to Non- Select the gateway to which the NE belongs, Gateway and go to Step 6. Step 5 Specify the protocol and IP address that the NE uses. If...

Then...

If the Protocol parameter is set to IP

Enter the IP Address of the NE.

If the Protocol parameter is set to OSI

Enter the NSAP Address of the NE.

Step 6 Specify NE User and Password. The default user name is root and the default password is password. Step 7 Click OK. Step 8 Click the Main Topology. Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8-11


8 Task Collection

The icon of the NE is displayed at the cursor position. ----End

8.2.1.3 Configuring the Logical Board If the logical board corresponding to the physical board is not added in the slot layout, add the logical board in the slot layout. If the physical board is inconsistent with the logical board in the slot layout, delete the inconsistent logical board and add the correct logical board.

Prerequisite l


l

All the boards must be installed correctly.


Procedure Step 1 Double-click the NE icon to open the NE layout diagram. Step 2 Optional: On the slot to which the board is to be added, right-click, and then choose Add XXX. NOTE

XXX is the name of the board to be added.

Step 3 Optional: On the slot to which the board is to be deleted, right-click, and then choose Delete.

8-12

1.

In the displayed confirmation dialog box, click OK.

2.

In the dialog box that is displayed again for confirmation, click OK.


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8 Task Collection

NOTE

Before deleting the board, delete the data, such as the service, clock, orderwire, and protection, on the board.

----End

8.2.1.4 Changing the NE ID Change the NE ID according to the engineering plan to guarantee that each NE ID is unique. This operation task does not interrupt services.



Procedure Step 1 In the Main Topology, right-click the NE whose ID needs to be changed. Step 2 Choose Object Attributes. The Attribute dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Click the NE Attribute[xxx] tab. NOTE

xxx indicates the current name of the NE.

Step 4 Click Modify NE ID. The Modify NE ID dialog box is displayed. Step 5 Specify New ID and New Extended ID.

Step 6 Click OK. A dialog box is displayed for confirmation, click OK. Step 7 Click OK. ----End

8.2.1.5 Changing the NE Name To better identify the NE in the Main Topology, name the NE according to the NE geographical location or the device connected to the NE.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher. Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8-13


8 Task Collection


Procedure Step 1 In the Main Topology, select the NE whose name is to be changed. Step 2 Right-click on this NE, and then choose Object Attributes from the shortcut menu. The Attributes dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Click the NE Attribute [xxx] tab. NOTE

xxx is the current name of the NE.

Step 4 Enter the name of the NE in Name. NOTE

The name of an NE cannot contain any space or characters.

Step 5 Click OK. Close the dialog box indicating the operation result. The new name of the NE is displayed below the NE icon in the Main Topology. ----End

8.2.1.6 Synchronizing the NE Time By setting the NE time to be synchronous with the time on the NMS or standard NTP server, you can record the exact time when alarms and abnormal events occur.

Prerequisite

8-14

l


l

When you need to synchronize the NE time with the time on the NMS server, the time zone and time must be set correctly on the PC or server running the NMS software.

l

When you need to synchronize the NE time with the time on the NTP server, the time on the NTP server must be set correctly and the NTP protocol must be normal. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8 Task Collection


Procedure Step 1 Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from the Main Menu. Step 2 Click the NE Time Synchronization tab. Step 3 In the physical view, select the NE whose time needs to be synchronized, and then click . Step 4 After the operation is complete, a dialog box is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. Step 5 When you need to synchronize the NE time with the NMS time, set the time synchronization mode and the related parameters. 1.

Optional: The NE time is synchronized with the NMS time immediately. a.

Right-click the NE whose time needs to be synchronized, and then choose Synchronize with NM Time from the shortcut menu.

b.

In the displayed confirmation dialog box, click Yes.

c.

Close the displayed operation result dialog box.

2.

Set Synchronous Mode to NM.

3.

Click Apply.

4.

Optional: Set auto synchronization parameters. a.

Set auto synchronization parameters. Click Apply.

b.

In the displayed confirmation dialog box, click Yes.

c.


NOTE

l When you need to synchronize the NE time with the NMS time, set Synchronous Mode to NM. l When you need to synchronize the NE time with the time on the NTP server, set Synchronous Mode to Standard NTP. Configure Standard NTP Authentication according to the requirements of the NTP server.

Step 6 When you need to synchronize the NE time with the time on the NTP server, set the time synchronization mode and the related parameters. 1.

Set Synchronous Mode to Standard NTP.

2.

Configure Standard NTP Authentication according to the requirements of the NTP server.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8-15


8 Task Collection

3.

Click Apply.

4.

Click Close. The dialog box that is displayed indicating the operation result is closed.

5.

Configure the upper-layer NTP server.

6.

a.

Select the NE, right-click in the configuration box where the standard NTP server is configured, and then choose New.

b.

Configure the parameters related to the NTP server.

c.

Click Apply.

d.


Optional: Copy the configuration of the upper-layer NTP server. NOTE

Before the copy operation, set Synchronous Mode to Standard NTP for the source NE and the target NE.

8-16

a.

Select the NE to be copied, right-click, and then choose Copy Standard NTP Server.

b.

Select the NE to be pasted, right-click, and then choose Paste Standard NTP Server.

c.

In the displayed confirmation dialog box, click Yes. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


d.

8 Task Collection


----End

8.2.1.7 Localizing the NE Time When the daylight saving time (DST) is used in the area where the NE is located, you need to localize the NE time to synchronize the NE time with the local time.



Procedure Step 1 Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Localization Management from the Main Menu. Step 2 Select the NE for time localization management from the Object Tree, and then click . Step 3 Click the Time Zone drop-down list, and then set the time zone of the NE. Step 4 Optional: Click DST, and then configure the related parameters. Step 5 Click Apply. Close the displayed dialog box. ----End

8.2.1.8 Configuring Standard NTP Keys When the NE time is synchronized with the time on the NTP server and the identity authentication is required, configure NTP keys.

Prerequisite l


l

Synchronous Mode must be set to Standard NTP and Standard NTP Authentication must be set to Enabled.

l

The NTP protocol must be running properly and the NTP identity authentication must be enabled on the NTP server.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials U2000 Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8-17


8 Task Collection

Procedure Step 1 Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from the Main Menu. Step 2 Click the Standard NTP Key Management tab. Step 3 In the physical view, select the NE whose NTP keys need to be configured, and then click . Step 4 Click Add. The Add Key and Password dialog box is displayed.

Step 5 After the related parameters are configured, click OK. ----End

8.2.2 Configuring the NE Data If an NE is not configured after being created successfully, you need to configure the NE data so that the NMS can manage this NE. 8.2.2.1 Uploading the NE Data Uploading the NE data is commonly used for configuring the NE data. By uploading the NE data, the data such as the configuration, alarm, and performance data of the NE is uploaded to the NMS. 8-18


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8 Task Collection

8.2.2.1 Uploading the NE Data Uploading the NE data is commonly used for configuring the NE data. By uploading the NE data, the data such as the configuration, alarm, and performance data of the NE is uploaded to the NMS.

Prerequisite l

An NE must be logged in to successfully.

l



Procedure Step 1 Select the corresponding operation steps according to the NE status. If...

Then...

An NE is not configured and the NE data needs to be uploaded.

In the Main Topology, double-click the NE that is not configured, and then perform Step 2 through Step 4.

An NE is configured with data and NE data Perform Step 5 through Step 8. needs to be uploaded. Step 2 In the displayed NE Configuration Wizard dialog box, select Upload, and then click Next. A dialog box is displayed for confirmation. Step 3 Click OK. Step 4 Click Close. Step 5 Choose Configuration > NE Configuration Data Management from the Main Menu. Step 6 Select the NE whose data needs to be uploaded from the Object Tree, and then click

.

Step 7 Select the NE, click Upload. In the displayed confirmation dialog box, click OK. The uploading is started. After the uploading is complete, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Step 8 Click Close. ----End

8.2.3 Configuring the Performance Monitoring Status of NEs By performing this operation task, you can manually enable or disable performance monitoring for NEs, or set the performance monitoring period.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher. Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8-19


8 Task Collection


Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree, and then choose Performance > Set NE Performance Monitoring Time from the Function Tree. Step 2 Configure the performance monitoring parameters of the NEs. 1.

Select 15-Minute or 24-Hour.

2.

Select Enabled or Disabled in Set 15-Minute Monitoring or Set 24-Hour Monitoring.

3.

Set the start time and end time of the performance monitoring of NEs. NOTE

l Generally, both Set 15-Minute Monitoring and Set 24-Hour Monitoring are enabled. l You can specify the start time of the performance monitoring function, only after selecting Enabled in the Set 15-Minute Monitoring or Set 24-Hour Monitoring area. l You can specify the end time of the performance monitoring function, only after selecting Enabled and then selecting To in the Set 15-Minute Monitoring or Set 24-Hour Monitoring area.

4.

Click Apply. Close the displayed dialog box.

----End

8.2.4 Connecting Fibers or Cables To implement the end-to-end management on the NMS, you need to connect fibers or cables. 8.2.4.1 Creating Optical Fibers by Using the Search Method By searching for optical fibers, the NMS can detect the information about optical fibers that are connected to specific IF ports and therefore quickly create optical fibers. The search-and-create method is the most common method for creating radio links . 8.2.4.2 Creating Fibers Manually You can create a fiber by specifying the ports connected by the fiber. This method can be used for creating radio links and Ethernet links. Ethernet links cannot be created by using the search and create method. 8-20


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8 Task Collection

8.2.4.3 Creating an Extended ECC Extended ECC connections indicate that the inter-NE DCN communication is implemented through concatenated NM ports. 8.2.4.4 Creating a Back-to-Back Radio Connection Back-to-back radio connections indicate the stacking of multiple OptiX RTN NEs on one site.

8.2.4.1 Creating Optical Fibers by Using the Search Method By searching for optical fibers, the NMS can detect the information about optical fibers that are connected to specific IF ports and therefore quickly create optical fibers. The search-and-create method is the most common method for creating radio links .

Prerequisite l


l

The IF boards of various NEs must be created on the NMS.


Procedure Step 1 Choose File > Discovery > Fiber from the Main Menu. Step 2 Select the IF board of the NE on which radio links need to be searched for from the Subject Tree. Step 3 Click Search. NOTE

l If Do not search the ports with Fiber/Cable created on NMS is selected, the port whose radio link is created is not searched on the NMS. l If you need to check whether the connection of a radio link is the same as the actual connection of the radio link, do not select Do not search the ports with Fiber/Cable created on NMS. l If Do not search the ports with Fiber/Cable created on NMS is selected and all the selected ports are created with radio links, a dialog box is displayed after the search, indicating that the search domain is null.

Step 4 After the operation is complete, a dialog box is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. Step 5 In Physical Fiber/Cable Link List, select one or multiple radio links, and then click Create Fiber/Cable. NOTE

l When you select one or multiple radio links from Physical Fiber/Cable Link List, the conflicting radio links are automatically displayed in Logical Fiber/Cable Link List. In this manner, you need to delete these conflicting radio links by referring to Step 6, and then create the links. l When you create radio links, No fiber to create is displayed if the selected radio links are in the Already created state.

Step 6 When you select one or multiple conflicting radio links from Logical Fiber/Cable Link List, click Delete Fiber/Cable. ----End Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8-21


8 Task Collection

Follow-up Procedure If the information about the radio links that are created using the search method is incomplete, you can supplement the information by changing the information about the radio links.

8.2.4.2 Creating Fibers Manually You can create a fiber by specifying the ports connected by the fiber. This method can be used for creating radio links and Ethernet links. Ethernet links cannot be created by using the search and create method.

Prerequisite l


l

The relevant boards of various NEs must be created on the NMS.

l

The resources of port IP addresses must be created if the automatic allocation of port IP addresses is enabled.


Procedure Step 1 In the Main Topology, select the icon

. Then, the cursor is displayed as "+".

Step 2 Click the source NE of a fiber in the Main Topology. Step 3 In the Select Fiber/Cable Source dialog box, select the source board and source port. Step 4 Click OK. In the Main Topology, the cursor is displayed as "+". Step 5 Click the sink NE of the fiber in the Main Topology. Step 6 In the Select Fiber/Cable Sink dialog box, select the sink board and sink port. Step 7 Click OK. Set the attributes of the fiber in the Create Fiber/Cable dialog box. Step 8 Click OK. Then, the created fiber is displayed between the source NE and the sink NE in the Main Topology. ----End

8.2.4.3 Creating an Extended ECC Extended ECC connections indicate that the inter-NE DCN communication is implemented through concatenated NM ports.


Tools, Equipment, and Materials U2000 8-22


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8 Task Collection

Procedure Step 1 Choose File > Create > Link from the Main Menu. The Create Link dialog box is displayed. Step 2 Choose Link > Extended ECC. Step 3 Configure the attributes of the created extended ECC according to the data plan.

Step 4 Click OK. In the Main Topology, the created extended ECC is displayed between the source NE and the sink NE. ----End

8.2.4.4 Creating a Back-to-Back Radio Connection Back-to-back radio connections indicate the stacking of multiple OptiX RTN NEs on one site.

Prerequisite l


l

The corresponding IF board must be added on the NE Panel.


Procedure Step 1 In the Main Topology, choose File > Create > Link. The Create Link dialog box is displayed. Step 2 Select Fiber/Cable > Microwave Back To Back. Step 3 Select the source NE from the drop-down list of Source NE. Step 4 Select the sink NE from the drop-down list of Sink NE. Step 5 Configure the attributes of the back-to-back radio connection.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8-23


8 Task Collection

Step 6 Click OK. The created back-to-back radio connection is displayed in the Main Topology. ----End

8.2.5 Managing Subnets To facilitate NE management, you can allocate the NEs that are in the same domain or have similar attributes into the same subnet. 8.2.5.1 Creating a Subnet In the Main Topology, you can create a subnet object and allocate an NE to this subnet. 8.2.5.2 Copying Topology Objects In the current topology, you can copy topology objects from one subnet to another subnet. 8.2.5.3 Moving Topology Objects In the current topology, you can move topology objects from one subnet to another subnet.

8.2.5.1 Creating a Subnet In the Main Topology, you can create a subnet object and allocate an NE to this subnet.



Procedure Step 1 In the Main Topology, right-click, and then choose New > Subnet. The Create Physical Subnet dialog box is displayed. Step 2 Click the Property tab. Step 3 Enter the attributes of the subnet.

8-24


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8 Task Collection

Step 4 Click the Select Object tab, select a created NE from Available Objects, and then click to add the NE to Selected Objects.

NOTE

l Click

to add the selected object in the left pane to the right pane.

l Click

to add all the objects in the left pane to the right pane.

Step 5 Click OK. Step 6 In the Main Topology, click in a blank area, and then the created subnet is displayed in the position where you click. ----End Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8-25


8 Task Collection

8.2.5.2 Copying Topology Objects In the current topology, you can copy topology objects from one subnet to another subnet.



Procedure Step 1 In the Main Topology, right-click the NE or subnet that needs to be copied. Step 2 Choose Edit > Copy to. The Select Path of Parent Subnet dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Select the subnet that the NE or subnet needs to be pasted to. Step 4 Click OK. ----End

8.2.5.3 Moving Topology Objects In the current topology, you can move topology objects from one subnet to another subnet.




Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8 Task Collection

Procedure Step 1 In the Main Topology, right-click the NE or subnet that needs to be moved. Step 2 Choose Edit > Move to. The Select Path of Parent Subnet dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Select the subnet that the NE or subnet needs to be moved to. Step 4 Click OK. ----End

8.2.6 Managing Communication To manage the NE by the NMS, ensure that the DCN communication is working properly. 8.2.6.1 Setting NE Communication Parameters The communication parameters of an NE include the IP address of the NE, the gateway IP address, and the subnet mask. 8.2.6.2 Configuring DCCs To meet the requirements for managing a complex network, you need to set the channel type, protocol type, or enable status of the DCCs according to the network plan. 8.2.6.3 Configuring Extended ECC Communication If there is no DCC between two or more NEs, you can connect the Ethernet NM ports or NE cascading ports on the system control boards of the NEs to achieve extended ECC communication. 8.2.6.4 Creating Static IP Routes When dynamic routes fail to meet the planning requirements, you need to create the corresponding static IP routes manually. 8.2.6.5 Setting OSPF Protocol Parameters When the OptiX RTN equipment is interconnected with third-party equipment, routing protocol communication works properly after you set OSPF protocol parameters of the OptiX RTN equipment based on related requirements of the third-party equipment. Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8-27


8 Task Collection

8.2.6.6 Enabling the Proxy ARP The proxy ARP enables the NEs in the same network segment but different domains to communicate with each other. 8.2.6.7 Configuring the VLAN ID and Bandwidth Used by an Inband DCN The VLAN ID used by an inband DCN must be different from the VLAN ID used by services and the bandwidth by an inband DCN must meet the requirements of the transmission network for managing messages. 8.2.6.8 Configuring the Enable Status of the Inband DCN Function on Ports The network management information can be transmitted over a link by the inband DCN only when the inband DCN function is enabled on the ports at both ends of the link. 8.2.6.9 Configuring the Protocol Type of the Inband DCN The inband DCN supports two types of protocol: IP and HWECC. The IP is the default protocol supported by the inband DCN. Generally, it is recommended that you use the default value. 8.2.6.10 Querying ECC Routes By querying ECC routes, you can check whether the correct HWECC solution is configured and whether the communication between NEs works properly. 8.2.6.11 Querying IP Routes By querying IP routes, you can check whether the IP over DCC solution and inband DCN solution are configured correctly and whether the communication between NEs works properly. 8.2.6.12 Configuring Access Control When the equipment is connected to the NMS through an Ethernet service port, you need to configure access control. 8.2.6.13 Setting SNMP Communications Parameters The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is the most popular network management protocol used on the TCP/IP networks. After you set SNMP communications parameters, the SNMP NMS can obtain alarm and performance event data from the OptiX RTN 950.

8.2.6.1 Setting NE Communication Parameters The communication parameters of an NE include the IP address of the NE, the gateway IP address, and the subnet mask.



Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > Communication Parameters from the Function Tree. Step 2 Configure the communication parameters of the NE. Step 3 Click Apply. Close the displayed dialog box. 8-28


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8 Task Collection

NOTE

If configuring multiple parameters, click Apply for each instance.

----End

8.2.6.2 Configuring DCCs To meet the requirements for managing a complex network, you need to set the channel type, protocol type, or enable status of the DCCs according to the network plan.



Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCC Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the DCC Rate Configuration tab. Step 3 Optional: Change the enable status of the DCC. 1.

Double-click the cell in the Enabled/Disabled column to which the DCC corresponds. Select the required state from the drop-down list.

2.

Click Apply.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8-29


8 Task Collection

Step 4 Optional: Change the protocol type of the DCC. 1.

Double-click the cell in the Protocol Type column to which the DCC corresponds. Select the required protocol type from the drop-down list.

2.

Click Apply.

NOTE

l If the port is connected to the other ECC subnet, Enabled/Disabled is set to Disabled. l If the port is connected to a third-party network and does not exchange the network management information with other ports, Enabled/Disabled is set to Disabled. The values recommended for Protocol Type are as follows: l If the IP over DCC solution is adopted, Protocol Type is set to TCP/IP. l If the OSI over DCC solution is adopted, Protocol Type is set to OSI. l Default values are recommended in other scenarios.

Step 5 Optional: Create DCCs. 1.

Click Create. The Create dialog box is displayed.

2.

Set the attributes of the DCC.

NOTE

The values recommended for Protocol Type are as follows: l If the IP over DCC solution is adopted, Protocol Type is set to TCP/IP. l If the OSI over DCC solution is adopted, Protocol Type is set to OSI. l Default values are recommended in other scenarios.

3.

Click OK.

----End

8.2.6.3 Configuring Extended ECC Communication If there is no DCC between two or more NEs, you can connect the Ethernet NM ports or NE cascading ports on the system control boards of the NEs to achieve extended ECC communication.


Tools, Instruments and Materials U2000 8-30


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8 Task Collection

Context The default extended ECC mode is Auto mode.

Procedure Step 1 Click an NE in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > ECC Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Optional: You can disable the Auto mode function of the extended ECC.

1.

Click Stop. A confirmation dialog box is displayed.

2.

Click OK.

Step 3 Optional: Set parameters for the extended ECC function in Specified mode at the server end. 1.

Set ECC Extended Mode to Specified mode.

2.

Set related parameters for the server end.

3.

Click Apply. A confirmation dialog box is displayed.

4.

Click OK.

Step 4 Set parameters for the extended ECC function in Specified mode at the client end. 1.


2.

Set related parameters for the client end.

3.


4.

Click OK.

Step 5 Enable the automatic extended ECC function. Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8-31


8 Task Collection NOTE

Before enabling the automatic extended ECC function, you need to clear related parameters that are configured in Specified mode for the server end and client end.

1.


2.

To clear parameters configured for the server end, click Clear Server. A confirmation dialog box is displayed.

3.

Click OK.

4.

To clear parameters configured for the client end, click Clear Client. A confirmation dialog box is displayed.

5.

Click OK.

6.

Set ECC Extended Mode to Auto mode.

7.


8.

Click OK.

----End

8.2.6.4 Creating Static IP Routes When dynamic routes fail to meet the planning requirements, you need to create the corresponding static IP routes manually.



Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the IP Route Management tab. Step 3 Click New. The Create an IP Route dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Set the parameters of the static IP route.

NOTE

The created static route has a lower priority than a dynamic route.

8-32


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8 Task Collection


8.2.6.5 Setting OSPF Protocol Parameters When the OptiX RTN equipment is interconnected with third-party equipment, routing protocol communication works properly after you set OSPF protocol parameters of the OptiX RTN equipment based on related requirements of the third-party equipment.



Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the OSPF Parameter Settings tab. Step 3 Set the parameters of the OSPF protocol.

NOTE

Set the parameters according to the network plan.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8-33


8 Task Collection

Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Optional: Set OSPF parameters for DCC channels. 1.

Click the Port OSPF Parameter Settings tab.

2.

Set the OSPF parameters for DCC channels.

3.

Click Apply.

----End

8.2.6.6 Enabling the Proxy ARP The proxy ARP enables the NEs in the same network segment but different domains to communicate with each other.


Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Proxy ARP tab. Step 3 Set the enable status of the proxy ARP.

NOTE

l The proxy ARP enables the NEs in the same network segment but different domains to communicate with each other. l To realize communication between such NEs, the source NE sends the ARP broadcast packet to address the route to the destination NE. The NE with the proxy ARP function enabled checks the routing table after sensing the ARP broadcast packet. If the routing table contains the destination address that the ARP broadcast packet looks for, the NE returns an ARP spoofing packet, which enables the NE that sends the ARP broadcast packet to consider that the MAC address of the NE that returns the ARP spoofing packet is the MAC address of the destination NE. In this manner, the packet that is to be sent to the destination NE is first sent to the NE with the proxy ARP function enabled and then forwarded to the destination NE.


8.2.6.7 Configuring the VLAN ID and Bandwidth Used by an Inband DCN The VLAN ID used by an inband DCN must be different from the VLAN ID used by services and the bandwidth by an inband DCN must meet the requirements of the transmission network for managing messages.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher. 8-34


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8 Task Collection


Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCN Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Bandwidth Management tab. Step 3 Set the VLAN ID and bandwidth used by an inband DCN.

NOTE

l If the default VLAN ID of the inband DCN conflicts with the VLAN ID in the service, the Ethernet Board VLAN ID of the inband DCN can be changed manually. The same VLAN ID must be, however, is used on the network-wide inband DCN. l Bandwidth(Kbit/s) specifies the bandwidth for inband DCN messaging on the Ethernet link. l IF Port Bandwidth(Kbit/s) specifies the bandwidth for inband DCN messaging on the radio link.


8.2.6.8 Configuring the Enable Status of the Inband DCN Function on Ports The network management information can be transmitted over a link by the inband DCN only when the inband DCN function is enabled on the ports at both ends of the link.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.


Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCN Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Port Settings tab. Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8-35


8 Task Collection

Step 3 Select FE/GE. Step 4 Configure the enable status of the inband DCN function on ports.

NOTE

l Enabled Status specifies the enabling status of the port. l The network management information can be transmitted over the inband DCN when the DCN function is enabled for the ports at both ends of a link.

Step 5 Click Apply. Step 6 Select IF. Step 7 Configure the enable status of the inband DCN function on ports.

NOTE

l Enabled Status specifies the enabling status of the port. l The network management information can be transmitted over the inband DCN when the DCN function is enabled for the ports at both ends of a link.


8.2.6.9 Configuring the Protocol Type of the Inband DCN The inband DCN supports two types of protocol: IP and HWECC. The IP is the default protocol supported by the inband DCN. Generally, it is recommended that you use the default value.

Prerequisite l


l

The corresponding board must be added to the NE Panel.


Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree, and then choose Communication > DCN Management from the Function Tree. 8-36


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8 Task Collection

Step 2 Click the Protocol Settings tab. Step 3 Set the protocol type of the inband DCN.

NOTE

l If the values of Protocol Type are different from each other, the equipment at both ends cannot be interconnected with each other. Therefore, Protocol Type must be set to the same value for the equipment at both ends of a link. l Set Protocol Type according to the network planning information. Generally, it is recommended that you set this parameter to IP.


8.2.6.10 Querying ECC Routes By querying ECC routes, you can check whether the correct HWECC solution is configured and whether the communication between NEs works properly.



Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > NE ECC Link Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Check whether the ECC route and related parameters are set correctly in NE ECC Link Management List. ----End

8.2.6.11 Querying IP Routes By querying IP routes, you can check whether the IP over DCC solution and inband DCN solution are configured correctly and whether the communication between NEs works properly.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.



8-37


8 Task Collection

Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the IP Route Management tab. Step 3 Click Query. Step 4 Check whether the IP routes and related parameters in the routing table are in accordance with the plan. ----End

8.2.6.12 Configuring Access Control When the equipment is connected to the NMS through an Ethernet service port, you need to configure access control.



Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Communication > DCN Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Access Control tab. Step 3 Set the parameters for configuring access control.

NOTE

l If the Enabled Status is set to Enabled, this port can be used to support access of the management information from the NMS. l If the Enabled Status is set to Disabled, this port cannot be used to support access of the management information from the NMS.

Step 4 Click Apply. ----End 8-38


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8 Task Collection

8.2.6.13 Setting SNMP Communications Parameters The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is the most popular network management protocol used on the TCP/IP networks. After you set SNMP communications parameters, the SNMP NMS can obtain alarm and performance event data from the OptiX RTN 950.


Background Information For the OptiX RTN 950, Trap Version can be SNMPV1 or SNMPV2C.

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE from the Object Tree and then choose Communication > SNMP Communication Parameters from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Create. Step 3 Set SNMP communications parameters of the OptiX RTN 950 based on the SNMP NMS requirements.


8.2.7 Configuring Service Access of NEs You can ensure the security of a network by setting service access of the NEs on the network. 8.2.7.1 Configuring LCT Access to NEs When an NE is managed by the NMS, LCT access to the NE can be configured if required. 8.2.7.2 Configuring Ethernet Access to NEs By default, the NMS can access an NE by using Ethernet ports. 8.2.7.3 Configuring Serial Port Access to NEs By default, the NMS can access an NE through serial ports. Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8-39


8 Task Collection

8.2.7.1 Configuring LCT Access to NEs When an NE is managed by the NMS, LCT access to the NE can be configured if required.



Context l

If the LCT requests to log in to an NE to which the NMS has logged in, the NE determines whether to permit the login of the LCT according to the status of LCT Access Control Switch.

l

If the LCT requests to log in to an NE to which the NMS has not logged in, the NE permits the login of the LCT regardless of the status of LCT Access Control Switch. The NMS, however, can log in to an NE to which the LCT has logged in. That is, the login of the LCT does not affect the login of the NMS. After the NMS user logs in to the NE successfully, the logged LCT user is not affected. If LCT Access Control Switch is set to Disable Access, the logged LCT user is also not affected.

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Security > LCT Access Control from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Select the required NE from the list, and click Access Allowed to enable the LCT access function. NOTE

To disable the LCT access function, click Disable Access.

Step 3 Close the displayed operation result dialog box. ----End

8.2.7.2 Configuring Ethernet Access to NEs By default, the NMS can access an NE by using Ethernet ports.




Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8 Task Collection

Background Information l

It is recommended that the LCT accesses an NE through Ethernet ports.

l

If you need to initialize an NE or perform software loading by using the LCT, the LCT needs to access the NE through Ethernet ports.

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Communication > Access Control from the Function Tree. Step 2 Set the status of the network port to Enabled and enable the Ethernet access function of the NE.

NOTE

To disable the Ethernet access function of an NE, set the status of the network port to Disabled.

Step 3 Click Apply. A confirmation dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Click OK. Close the displayed operation result dialog box. ----End

8.2.7.3 Configuring Serial Port Access to NEs By default, the NMS can access an NE through serial ports.



Context If the LCT cannot access an NE through serial ports when the Enable Serial Port Access check box is selected, the LCT access function may be disabled.

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Communication > Access Control from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select the Enable Serial Port Access check box and select Access NM. Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8-41


8 Task Collection

Step 3 Click Apply. Close the displayed operation result dialog box. Step 4 Optional: Select the baud rate of the serial port from the Baud Rate drop-down list. Click Apply. Close the displayed operation result dialog box. ----End

8.2.8 Configuring an NE User NE users refer to the users who log in to and operate NEs. Different types of NE users are assigned different rights to log in and manage NEs. 8.2.8.1 Creating an NE User Based on the operation rights, NE users are divided into five levels, which involve monitoring level, operation level, maintenance level, system level, and debugging level in an ascending order. Different levels of NE users can be created as required. 8.2.8.2 Changing the Password of an NE User Periodically changing the password of an NE user ensures the NE security. 8.2.8.3 Setting Warning Screen Parameters This topic describes how to enable the warning screen function. When a user logs in to an NE, the NMS can display some information to the user. The displayed information can be defined by users. 8.2.8.4 Switching NE Users This section describes how to switch an NE user to a higher-level NE user when the operations on the NMS are beyond the operation rights of the NE user.

8.2.8.1 Creating an NE User Based on the operation rights, NE users are divided into five levels, which involve monitoring level, operation level, maintenance level, system level, and debugging level in an ascending order. Different levels of NE users can be created as required.

Prerequisite

8-42

l

You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.

l

An online user can create a user at a lower level.


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8 Task Collection



The default NE user is at the monitoring level.

l

For security of NE data, NE users are assigned operation rights based on their responsibilities.

Procedure Step 1 Select the required NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Security > NE User Management from the Function Tree. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Step 2 Close the dialog box. Step 3 Click Add. The Add NE User Attribute/Value dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Set the parameters of the NE user according to the network plan.

NOTE

l A Debug Level NE user has all security and configuration authorities, and has the right to run debugging commands. l A System Level NE user has all security and configuration authorities. l A Maintenance Level NE user has some security authorities, some configuration authorities, the communication setting authority, and the log management authority. l An Operation Level NE user has all fault performance authorities, some security authorities, and some configuration authorities. l A Monitor Level NE user has the right to use all query commands, to log in, to log out, and to change its own password.

Step 5 Click OK. Close the displayed dialog box. ----End Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8-43


8 Task Collection

8.2.8.2 Changing the Password of an NE User Periodically changing the password of an NE user ensures the NE security.

Prerequisite l


l

The NE user is created.

l

An online user can change the password of a user at a lower level.


Background Information NOTE

Periodically change the password of an NE user to avoid password leaks.

Procedure Step 1 Select the required NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Security > NE User Management from the Function Tree. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Step 2 Close the dialog box. Step 3 Select the required NE user from the NE user management list, and click Set Password. The Set Password of NE User dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Input New Password, and input it again in Confirm Password.

Step 5 Click OK. Close the displayed dialog box. ----End 8-44


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8 Task Collection

8.2.8.3 Setting Warning Screen Parameters This topic describes how to enable the warning screen function. When a user logs in to an NE, the NMS can display some information to the user. The displayed information can be defined by users.

Prerequisite You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.


Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree. Choose Security > NE Security Parameters from the Function Tree. Step 2 Set Warning Screen Switching and Warning Screen Information according to the network plan.

Step 3 Click Apply. Close the displayed dialog box. ----End

8.2.8.4 Switching NE Users This section describes how to switch an NE user to a higher-level NE user when the operations on the NMS are beyond the operation rights of the NE user.

Prerequisite l


l

An NE user is created.


Background Information An NE cannot be logged in to and managed by the same NE user from different servers at the same time. If the same NE user from different servers logs in to an NE at different time, the first online user will be forcibly logged out of the NE.

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree. Choose Security > NE Login Management from the Function Tree. Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8-45


8 Task Collection

Step 2 Select the required NE, and click Switch NE User. The Switch Current NE User dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Set User and Password of the user to be switched.

Step 4 Click OK. Close the displayed dialog box. ----End

8.2.9 Configuring SSL Protocol Communication The security socket layer (SSL) protocol provides encrypted and reliable communication between entities. Therefore, SSL protocol communication greatly improves the network management security. 8.2.9.1 Configuring SSL Protocol Communication Between a U2000 Server and its Clients Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) protocol communication between a U2000 server and its clients is supported only after corresponding configurations are performed on the U2000 server and clients. 8.2.9.2 Configuring the Connection Mode Between a U2000 Client and Its Gateway NE Two connection modes are supported between a U2000 client and its gateway NE, namely common connection mode and Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) connection mode.

8.2.9.1 Configuring SSL Protocol Communication Between a U2000 Server and its Clients Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) protocol communication between a U2000 server and its clients is supported only after corresponding configurations are performed on the U2000 server and clients.

Prerequisite The connection mode of the U2000 server is set to SSL. 8-46


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8 Task Collection



Two connection modes are supported, which are Common and Security(SSL) and which can be queried on the U2000 server by running a query command.

l

The default connection mode is Common. NOTE

l When the U2000 server and its client are deployed on the same host and the U2000 server uses the SSL connection mode, the client can log in to the server by using the common or SSL connection mode. When the U2000 server and its client are deployed on the same host and the U2000 server uses the common connection mode, the client can log in to the server only by using the common connection mode. l When the U2000 server and its client are deployed on different hosts, the client can log in to the U2000 server only by using the same connection mode as the U2000 server.

Procedure Step 1 Start the U2000 client. . Step 2 In the Login interface, click The Server List dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Select the required U2000 server and click Modify. The Modify Server Information dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Set Mode to Security(SSL). Step 5 Click OK. Step 6 Click OK. ----End

8.2.9.2 Configuring the Connection Mode Between a U2000 Client and Its Gateway NE Two connection modes are supported between a U2000 client and its gateway NE, namely common connection mode and Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) connection mode.

Prerequisite l Issue 02 (2011-05-20)

You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-47


8 Task Collection

l

SSL licenses have been deployed on the gateway NE and the U2000 client according to the SSL loading guide.


Procedure Step 1 Configure the connection mode of the U2000 client. 1.

Choose Administration > DCN Management from Main Menu. The Filter NE dialog box is displayed.

2.

Click Cancel and then click the GNE tab. The Filter GNE dialog box is displayed.

3.

Click

4.

Click OK.

5.

Select the required NE, right-click the NE, and choose Modify GNE from the shortcut menu. The Modify GNE dialog box is displayed.

6.

Change the value of Connection Mode to Security SSL.

7.

Click OK. A warning dialog box is displayed.

8.

Click OK. Close the displayed dialog box.

, choose the required gateway NE, and then click OK.

Step 2 Configure the connection mode of the gateway NE. 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > Communication Parameters from the Function Tree.

2.

Set Connection Mode to Security SSL or Common + Security SSL. NOTE

If Connection Mode of a gateway NE is Security SSL, tools (such as the Web LCT and DC) that use the common connection mode cannot communicate with the gateway NE.

8-48


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


3.

Click Apply. A warning dialog box is displayed.

4.

Click OK. A warning dialog box is displayed again.

5.

Click OK. Close the displayed operation result dialog box.

8 Task Collection

----End

8.3 Managing Radio Links Before you configure the radio link between two microwave sites, configure the information about the radio link. 8.3.1 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Group If the radio link requires 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection, create the IF 1+1 protection group. 8.3.2 Creating an XPIC Workgroup After you create an XPIC workgroup comprised of two XPIC radio links, the two radio links take the same values for the parameters including the channel bandwidth, transmit frequency, transmit power, and ATPC attributes. 8.3.3 Configuring the Power to Be Received for the ODUs in an XPIC Workgroup After creating an XPIC workgroup, you need to configure the receive power of the ODUs used on the IP radio links in the XPIC workgroup. 8.3.4 Setting the AM Attributes of the XPIC Workgroup After the XPIC workgroup is created, configure the AM attributes of the XPIC IP radio link according to the planned values. 8.3.5 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8-49


8 Task Collection

By performing this operation, you can configure the IF/ODU information for a radio link. 8.3.6 Querying the IF 1+1 Protection Status You can learn about the current information about the IF 1+1 protection by querying the IF 1+1 protection status. 8.3.7 IF 1+1 Protection Switching You can perform external switching on the IF 1+1 protection by performing IF 1+1 protection switching.

8.3.1 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Group If the radio link requires 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection, create the IF 1+1 protection group.

Prerequisite l


l

The IF boards and the ODUs to which the IF boards are connected must be added on the NE Panel.

l

The IF boards of an IF 1+1 FD/SD protection group must be configured in two paired slots.


Background Information When a 1+0 service is converted into a 1+1 HSB protection configuration by configuring the IF 1+1 protection group, the original service is not interrupted. The board that carries the original service, however, needs to be set as the working board.

Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Create. The Create IF 1+1 Protection dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Configure the parameters of the IF 1+1 protection group.

8-50


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8 Task Collection

NOTE

l When Working Mode is set to HSB, the equipment provides a 1+1 hot standby configuration for the IF board and ODU at both ends of each hop of a radio link to realize the protection. l When Working Mode is set to FD, the system uses two channels that have a frequency spacing between them, to transmit and receive the same signal. The remote end selects signals from the two received signals. With FD protection, the impact of the fading on signal transmission is reduced. l When Working Mode is set to SD, the system uses two antennas that have a space distance between them, to receive the same signal. The equipment selects signals from the two received signals. With SD protection, the impact of the fading on signal transmission is reduced. l When Revertive Mode is set to Revertive Mode, the NE that is in the switching state releases the switching and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state some time after the former working channel is restored to normal. It is recommended that you set this parameter to Revertive Mode. l When Revertive Mode is set to Non-Revertive, the NE that is in the switching state keeps the current state unchanged unless another switching occurs even though the former working channel is restored to normal. l You can set WTR Time(s) only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive Mode. It is recommended that you use the default value. l Enable Reverse Switching is valid only when Working Mode is set to HSB or SD. l Generally, if Working Mode is set to HSB, it is recommended that you set Enable Reverse Switching to Disabled; if Working Mode is set to SD, it is recommended that you set Enable Reverse Switching to Enabled. l Each of the parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, WTR Time(s), and Enable Reverse Switching must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio hop.

Step 4 Click OK. Close the displayed operation result dialog box. ----End

8.3.2 Creating an XPIC Workgroup After you create an XPIC workgroup comprised of two XPIC radio links, the two radio links take the same values for the parameters including the channel bandwidth, transmit frequency, transmit power, and ATPC attributes.

Prerequisite l


l

The corresponding XPIC IF boards and the ODUs connected to the XPIC IF boards are added to the NE Panel.


Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the XPIC tab. Step 3 Click New. The Create XPIC Working Group dialog box is displayed. Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8-51


8 Task Collection

Step 4 Configure the parameters for the XPIC workgroup.

NOTE

l Set Link ID-V, Link ID-H, Transmit Power(dBM), Maximum Transmit Power(dBM), and Transmission Frequency(MHz) according the network plan. Set Link ID-V, Link ID-H, Transmit Power(dBM), T/R Spacing(MHz), and ATPC Status to the same values for both ends of a link. l In normal cases, Transmission Status is set to unmute.


8.3.3 Configuring the Power to Be Received for the ODUs in an XPIC Workgroup After creating an XPIC workgroup, you need to configure the receive power of the ODUs used on the IP radio links in the XPIC workgroup.

Prerequisite l


l

An XPIC workgroup has been created.


8-52


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8 Task Collection

Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the XPIC tab. Step 3 Configure the power to be received for the ODUs in the horizontally and vertically polarized directions of the XPIC workgroup.

NOTE

l Configure the same power to be received for the ODUs in the horizontally and vertically polarized directions of the XPIC workgroup. l Power to Be Received(dBm) is used to set the expected receive power of the ODU and is mainly used in the antenna alignment stage. After this parameter is set, the NE automatically enables the antenna misalignment indicating function. l When Power to Be Received(dBm) takes the default value (-10.0), the antenna misalignment indicating function is disabled.


8.3.4 Setting the AM Attributes of the XPIC Workgroup After the XPIC workgroup is created, configure the AM attributes of the XPIC IP radio link according to the planned values.

Prerequisite l


l

The workgroup must be created.


Background Information The XPIC IF boards (ISX2 boards) support IP radio, and the AM attributes can be configured.

Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the XPIC tab. Step 3 Click the Hybrid/AM Configuration tab. Step 4 Configure the AM attributes of the XPIC radio link. Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8-53


8 Task Collection

NOTE

l When AM Status is set to Disabled, the radio link uses only the specified modulation scheme. In this case, you need to select Manually Specified Modulation Mode. l When AM Status is set to Enabled, the radio link uses the corresponding modulation scheme according to the channel conditions. l Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity specifies the lowest-gain modulation scheme that the AM function supports. This parameter is set according to the network plan. Generally, the value of this parameter is determined by the service transmission bandwidth that the IP radio must ensure and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme. l Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity specifies the highest-gain modulation scheme that the AM function supports. This parameter is set according to the network plan. Generally, the value of this parameter is determined by the bandwidth of the services that need to be transmitted over the IP radio and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme. l Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity must be higher than Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity.


8.3.5 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link By performing this operation, you can configure the IF/ODU information for a radio link.

Prerequisite l


l



Precautions

8-54

l

In the case of 1+1 HSB/SD protection, you need to configure only the IF/ODU information of the main radio link.

l

In the case of 1+1 FD protection, you need to configure the IF/ODU information of the main radio link and the ODU information of the standby radio link. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8 Task Collection

l

In the case of XPIC configuration, you need to configure the IF/ODU information of the two radio links in different polarization directions separately.

l

The MW_CFG_MISMATCH alarm is reported, if the AM enabled status, or modulation mode is set inconsistently for both ends of an IP radio link. This alarm should be cleared immediately. Otherwise, services may be configured unsuccessfully or interrupted.

Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab. Step 3 Click an IF board icon or ODU icon. The system displays the IF/ODU information of the radio link that the IF board or ODU connected to the IF board belongs to. Step 4 Configure the corresponding IF information of the radio link.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8-55



l Link ID is set according to the network plan. Each radio link of an NE should have a unique link ID, and the link IDs at both ends of a radio link should be the same. l When AM Status is set to Disabled, the radio link uses only the specified modulation scheme. In this case, you need to select Manually Specified Modulation Mode. l When AM Status is set to Enabled, the radio link uses the corresponding modulation scheme according to the channel conditions. l Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity specifies the lowest-gain modulation scheme that the AM function supports. This parameter is set according to the network plan. Generally, the value of this parameter is determined by the service transmission bandwidth that the IP radio must ensure and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme. l Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity specifies the highest-gain modulation scheme that the AM function supports. This parameter is set according to the network plan. Generally, the value of this parameter is determined by the bandwidth of the services that need to be transmitted over the IP radio and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme. l Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity must be higher than Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity.

Step 5 Configure the corresponding ODU information of the radio link.

NOTE

l Power to Be Received(dBm) is used to set the expected receive power of the ODU and is mainly used in the antenna alignment stage. After this parameter is set, the NE automatically enables the antenna misalignment indicating function. l When Power to Be Received(dBm) takes the default value (-10.0), the antenna misalignment indicating function is disabled. l In normal cases, it is recommended that you set TX Status to unmute.


8.3.6 Querying the IF 1+1 Protection Status You can learn about the current information about the IF 1+1 protection by querying the IF 1+1 protection status. 8-56


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8 Task Collection

Prerequisite l


l

The IF 1+1 protection must be configured.


Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Query. Close the displayed operation result dialog box. In Protection Group, check the IF 1+1 protection groups. Step 3 Select the IF 1+1 protection group whose protection status needs to be queried. Step 4 Click Query Switch Status, and then close the displayed prompt dialog box. In Slot Mapping Settings, check the protection status of the IF 1+1 protection group. ----End

8.3.7 IF 1+1 Protection Switching You can perform external switching on the IF 1+1 protection by performing IF 1+1 protection switching.

Prerequisite l


l

The IF 1+1 protection must be configured.


Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree. Step 2 In Protection Group, select the protection group for protection switching. Step 3 In Slot Mapping Settings, select a working unit or the protection unit of the protection group, and then right-click the selected unit. Step 4 Choose the required switching mode from the shortcut menu. The system displays the dialog box that indicates the successful operation. Step 5 Click Close. Step 6 Click Query Switching Status and check whether the switching is successful, and then close the displayed prompt dialog box. ----End Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8-57


8 Task Collection

8.4 Managing Ports Setting correct port parameter is the basis of configuring ports that transmit services. 8.4.1 Setting Ethernet Port Parameters Ethernet port parameters include basic attributes, traffic control, Layer-2 attributes, and advanced attributes. 8.4.2 Setting IF_ETH Port Parameters This section describes how to set the IF_ETH port parameters. The IF_ETH port is the internal Ethernet port on an IF board in IP radio mode and is used to receive and transmit Native ETH services or packet services. 8.4.3 Setting IF Port Parameters This section describes how to set IF port parameters, including IF attributes, ATPC attributes, and AM attributes. 8.4.4 Setting ODU Port Parameters This section describes how to set ODU port parameters, including the transmit frequency attributes, power attributes, ODU information, and advanced attributes.

8.4.1 Setting Ethernet Port Parameters Ethernet port parameters include basic attributes, traffic control, Layer-2 attributes, and advanced attributes. 8.4.1.1 Setting the Basic Attributes of Ethernet Ports Basic Ethernet port attributes define the physical-layer information, such as the interface mode, encapsulation type, and maximum frame length. 8.4.1.2 Configuring the Traffic Control of Ethernet Ports After traffic control is enabled, the Ethernet port sends the pause frame to instruct the peer end to stop sending Ethernet packets for a period if the link is congested, eliminating link congestion. 8.4.1.3 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes of Ethernet Ports Ethernet port Layer 2 attributes define link-layer information. 8.4.1.4 Setting the Advanced Attributes of Ethernet Ports You can configure MAC/PHY layer loopbacks, check the port rates, and configure loopback detection and broadcast packet suppression functions by setting related Ethernet advanced attributes.

8.4.1.1 Setting the Basic Attributes of Ethernet Ports Basic Ethernet port attributes define the physical-layer information, such as the interface mode, encapsulation type, and maximum frame length.

Prerequisite

8-58

l


l

The Ethernet board must be added on the NE Panel. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8 Task Collection


Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Basic Attributes tab. Step 3 Set basic Ethernet port attributes.

NOTE

l Port Mode specifies the mode of the Ethernet port. l If Port Mode is Layer 2, Encapsulation Type can be set to Null, 802.1Q, or QinQ. l If Port Mode is Layer 3, Encapsulation Type can be set to 802.1Q only and the port can carry MPLS tunnels. l Encapsulation Type specifies the method of the port to process the received packets. l If you set Encapsulation Type to Null, the port transparently transmits the received packets. l If you set Encapsulation Type to 802.1Q, the port identifies the packets that comply with the IEEE 802.1q standard. l If you set Encapsulation Type to QinQ, the port identifies the packets that comply with the IEEE 802.1ad QinQ standard. l The Ethernet ports of different types support different Working Mode. l When the equipment on the opposite side works in auto-negotiation mode, set the Working Mode of the equipment on the local side to Auto-Negotiation. l When the equipment on the opposite side works in full-duplex mode, set the Working Mode of the equipment on the local side to 10M Full-Duplex, 100M Full-Duplex, or 1000M Full-Duplex depending on the port rate of the equipment on the opposite side. l When the equipment on the opposite side works in half-duplex mode, set the Working Mode of the equipment on the local side to 10M Half-Duplex, 100M Half-Duplex, or Auto-Negotiation depending on the port rate of the equipment on the opposite side. l FE ports support 10M full-duplex, 10M half-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 100M half-duplex, and autonegotiation. l GE electrical ports support 10M full-duplex, 10M half-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 100M half-duplex, 1000M full-duplex, and auto-negotiation. l GE optical ports support 1000M full-duplex and auto-negotiation. l The value of Max Frame Length(byte) should be greater than the length of any frame to be transported. l Auto-Negotiation Ability specifies the auto-negotiation capability of the Ethernet port. l For GE optical ports, Auto-Negotiation Ability can be set to 1000M Full-Duplex only. l Auto-Negotiation Ability is valid only when Working Mode is set to Auto-Negotiation. l The SFP on the EM6F board supports the optical port and electrical port.


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8-59


8 Task Collection

8.4.1.2 Configuring the Traffic Control of Ethernet Ports After traffic control is enabled, the Ethernet port sends the pause frame to instruct the peer end to stop sending Ethernet packets for a period if the link is congested, eliminating link congestion.

Prerequisite l


l

The Ethernet board must be added on the NE Panel.


Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Flow Control tab. Step 3 Configure the Ethernet port traffic control.

NOTE

l Auto-Negotiation Flow Control Mode is valid only when Working Mode is set to AutoNegotiation. l Auto-Negotiation Flow Control Mode of the equipment on the local side must be consistent with the auto-negotiation flow control mode of the equipment on the opposite side l The OptiX RTN 950 supports only two auto-negotiation flow control modes, namely, Disabled mode and Enable Symmetric Flow Control mode. l Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode is valid only when Working Mode is not set to AutoNegotiation. l Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode of the equipment on the local side must be consistent with the non-autonegotiation flow control mode of the equipment on the opposite side l The OptiX RTN 950 supports only two non-auto-negotiation flow control modes, namely, Disabled mode and Enable Symmetric Flow Control mode.


8.4.1.3 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes of Ethernet Ports Ethernet port Layer 2 attributes define link-layer information. 8-60


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8 Task Collection

Prerequisite l


l


l

Port Mode of Ethernet ports are set to Layer 2.


Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Layer 2 Attributes tab. Step 3 Set Ethernet port Layer 2 attributes.

NOTE

l When Encapsulation Type in the General Attributes tab page is set to QinQ, you need to set QinQ Type Domain. The default value is 88A8. l When Encapsulation Type in the General Attributes tab page is set to Null or 802.1Q, you cannot set QinQ Type Domain. In this case, QinQ Type Domain is displayed as FFFF and cannot be changed. l QinQ Type Domain should be set to the same value for all the ports on the EM6T/EM6F board. l If all the accessed services are frames with the VLAN tag (tagged frames), set TAG to Tag Aware. l If all the accessed services are frames without the VLAN tag (untagged frames), set TAG to Access. l If the accessed services contain tagged frames and untagged frames, set TAG to Hybrid. l Default VLAN ID is valid only when TAG is set to Access or Hybrid. l VLAN Priority is valid only when TAG is set to Access or Hybrid. l When the VLAN priority is required to divide streams or to be used for other purposes, VLAN Priority is set according to the planning information. In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value.

Step 4 Click Apply. A warning dialog box is displayed. Step 5 Click OK. Close the displayed operation result dialog box. ----End Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8-61


8 Task Collection

8.4.1.4 Setting the Advanced Attributes of Ethernet Ports You can configure MAC/PHY layer loopbacks, check the port rates, and configure loopback detection and broadcast packet suppression functions by setting related Ethernet advanced attributes.

Prerequisite l


l



Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Advanced Attributes tab. Step 3 Set Ethernet port advanced attributes.


8.4.2 Setting IF_ETH Port Parameters This section describes how to set the IF_ETH port parameters. The IF_ETH port is the internal Ethernet port on an IF board in IP radio mode and is used to receive and transmit Native ETH services or packet services. 8.4.2.1 Setting the Basic Attributes of IF_ETH Ports Basic IF_ETH port attributes specify the basic information, including the port mode and encapsulation mode. 8.4.2.2 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes of IF_ETH Ports IF_ETH port Layer 2 attributes specify the relevant information about the link layer, including the tag attribute and QinQ type domain. 8.4.2.3 Setting the Advanced Attributes of IF_ETH Ports This section describes how to set the advanced attributes of IF_ETH ports.

8.4.2.1 Setting the Basic Attributes of IF_ETH Ports Basic IF_ETH port attributes specify the basic information, including the port mode and encapsulation mode. 8-62


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8 Task Collection

Prerequisite l


l

The corresponding IF board must be added to NE Panel.


Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Basic Attributes tab. Step 3 Set basic IF_ETH port attributes.

NOTE

l If Port Mode is Layer 2, Encapsulation Type can be set to Null, 802.1Q, or QinQ. l If Port Mode is Layer 3, Encapsulation Type can be set to 802.1Q only and the port can carry tunnels. l Encapsulation Type specifies the method of the port to process the received packets. l If Encapsulation Type is set to Null, the port transparently transmits the received packets. l If Encapsulation Type is set to 802.1Q, the port identifies the packets that comply with the IEEE 802.1Q standard. l If Encapsulation Type is set to QinQ, the port identifies the packets that comply with the IEEE 802.1ad QinQ standard.


8.4.2.2 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes of IF_ETH Ports IF_ETH port Layer 2 attributes specify the relevant information about the link layer, including the tag attribute and QinQ type domain.

Prerequisite l


l


l

The parameter Port Mode is set to Layer 2.


Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree. Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8-63


8 Task Collection

Step 2 Click the Layer 2 Attributes tab. Step 3 Set IF_ETH port Layer 2 attributes.

NOTE

l When Encapsulation Type in the General Attributes tab page is set to QinQ, you need to set QinQ Type Domain. The default value is 88A8. l When Encapsulation Type in the General Attributes tab page is set to Null or 802.1Q, you cannot set QinQ Type Domain. In this case, QinQ Type Domain is displayed as FFFF and cannot be changed. l If all the accessed services are frames that contain the VLAN tag (tagged frames), set Tag to "Tag Aware". l If all the accessed services are frames that do not contain the VLAN tag (untagged frames), set Tag to "Access". l If the accessed services contain tagged frames and untagged frames, set Tag to "Hybrid". l Default VLAN ID is valid only when TAG is set to Access or Hybrid. l VLAN Priority is valid only when TAG is set to Access or Hybrid. l When the VLAN priority is required to divide streams or to be used for other purposes, VLAN Priority needs to be set according to the planning information. In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value.


8.4.2.3 Setting the Advanced Attributes of IF_ETH Ports This section describes how to set the advanced attributes of IF_ETH ports.

Prerequisite l


l



Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Advanced Attributes tab. Step 3 Set IF_ETH port advanced attributes.

8-64


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8 Task Collection

NOTE

l If Speed Transmission at L2 is set to Enabled, the Layer-2 Ethernet packets transmitted at microwave ports will be compressed to improve transmission efficiency. l The settings of Speed Transmission at L2 must be the same at both ends of a radio link. l If Speed Transmission at L3 is set to Enabled, the IP packets transmitted at microwave ports will be compressed to improve transmission efficiency. l The settings of Speed Transmission at L3 must be the same at both ends of a radio link.


8.4.3 Setting IF Port Parameters This section describes how to set IF port parameters, including IF attributes, ATPC attributes, and AM attributes. 8.4.3.1 Setting IF Attributes Set parameters specific to different IF boards. 8.4.3.2 Configuring ATPC Attributes To configure the ATPC function, set the ATPC attributes of the IF board. 8.4.3.3 Querying the AM Status By querying the AM status, you can trace the change of the modulation mode when the AM function is used. 8.4.3.4 Querying ATPC Adjustment Records By querying the ATPC adjustment records, you can view the ATPC running status.

8.4.3.1 Setting IF Attributes Set parameters specific to different IF boards.

Prerequisite l


l

The corresponding IF board must be added on the NE Panel.


Context l

The ISU2 boards are general-purpose IF boards.

l

The ISX2 boards are general-purpose XPIC IF boards.

Procedure Step 1 Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the IF Attributes tab. Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8-65


8 Task Collection

Step 3 Set the parameters of general attributes. l For the ISU2 board:

l For the ISX2 board:

NOTE

l Link ID is set according to the network plan. Each radio link of an NE should have a unique link ID, and the link IDs at both ends of a radio link should be the same. l Generally, IF Port Loopback is used to locate the faults that occur at each IF interface. The IF loopback is used for diagnosis. If this function is enabled, the services at the related ports are affected. In normal cases, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback. l 350 MHz Consecutive Wave Status can be set to Start in the commissioning process only. In normal cases, this parameter is set to Stop. Otherwise, the services are interrupted. l If the XPIC IF board does not perform the XPIC function, XPIC Enabled should be set to Disabled. l Enable IEEE-1588 Timeslot needs to be set consistently between two ends of a radio link.

Step 4 Configure the parameters of AM attributes for different IF services. For the ISU2 and ISX2 boards:

NOTE

l When AM Status is set to Disabled, the radio link uses only the specified modulation scheme. In this case, you need to select Manually Specified Modulation Mode. l When AM Status is set to Enabled, the radio link uses the corresponding modulation scheme according to the channel conditions. l Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity specifies the lowest-gain modulation scheme that the AM function supports. This parameter is set according to the network plan. Generally, the value of this parameter is determined by the service transmission bandwidth that the IP radio must ensure and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme. l Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity specifies the highest-gain modulation scheme that the AM function supports. This parameter is set according to the network plan. Generally, the value of this parameter is determined by the bandwidth of the services that need to be transmitted over the IP radio and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme. l Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity must be higher than Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity.


8.4.3.2 Configuring ATPC Attributes To configure the ATPC function, set the ATPC attributes of the IF board.

Prerequisite

8-66

l


l

The corresponding IF board must be added on the NE Panel. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8 Task Collection

Precautions l

For the IF boards that are configured with 1+1 protection, configure only the ATPC attributes of the main IF board.

l

The following procedure describes the ATPC parameter configurations in the IF port configuration dialog box for the IF board. You can also configure ATPC parameters in the Create XPIC Protection Group window.


Procedure Step 1 Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the ATPC Attributes tab. Step 3 Set the parameters of ATPC attributes.

NOTE

l The settings of the ATPC attributes must be consistent at both ends of a radio link. l In the case of areas where fast fading severely affects the radio transmission, it is recommended that you set ATPC Enable Status to Disabled. l If ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status is set to Enabled, the equipment automatically uses the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds according to the work mode of the radio link. l If ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status is set to Disabled, you need to manually set ATPC Upper Automatic Threshold(dBm) and ATPC Lower Automatic Threshold(dBm). l It is recommended that you set ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) to the sum of the planned central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm) to the difference between the planned central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB.


8.4.3.3 Querying the AM Status By querying the AM status, you can trace the change of the modulation mode when the AM function is used.

Prerequisite l


l

The corresponding IF boards must be added in the NE Panel.



8-67


8 Task Collection

Procedure Step 1 Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the IF Attributes tab. Step 3 Click Query. Step 4 Query the AM information in Hybrid/AM Configuration. ----End

8.4.3.4 Querying ATPC Adjustment Records By querying the ATPC adjustment records, you can view the ATPC running status.

Prerequisite l


l

The corresponding IF board must be added.


Procedure Step 1 Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ATPC Adjustment Records from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Query to query the running information. ----End

8.4.4 Setting ODU Port Parameters This section describes how to set ODU port parameters, including the transmit frequency attributes, power attributes, ODU information, and advanced attributes. 8.4.4.1 Setting ODU Transmit Frequency Attributes The ODU transmit frequency attributes define the DOU transmit frequency and T/R spacing. 8.4.4.2 Querying ODU Information ODU information provides details about the ODU. 8.4.4.3 Setting ODU Power Attributes The ODU power attributes define the transmit power and receive power of the ODU. 8.4.4.4 Setting ODU Advanced Attributes ODU advanced attributes define the ODU transmit status. 8.4.4.5 Setting the ODU Transmitter State The state of an ODU transmitter can be mute or unmute. When the ODU transmitter is in the unmute state, the ODU transmits and receives microwave signals normally. When the ODU transmitter is in the mute state, the ODU transmitter does not work, but the ODU can receive microwave signals. 8-68


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8 Task Collection

8.4.4.6 Querying the Historical Transmit Power and Receive Power If the radio link requires troubleshooting, query the change trend for the historical transmit power and receive power for reference.

8.4.4.1 Setting ODU Transmit Frequency Attributes The ODU transmit frequency attributes define the DOU transmit frequency and T/R spacing.

Prerequisite l


l



Procedure Step 1 Select the ODU from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Radio Frequency Attributes tab. Step 3 Configure Transmit Frequency(MHz) and T/R Spacing(MHz) of the ODU.

NOTE

l The value of Transmit Frequency(MHz) must not be less than the sum of the minimum transmit frequency supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing, and must not be more than the difference between the maximum transmit frequency supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing. l The difference between the transmit frequencies at both ends of a radio link should be one T/R spacing. l If the ODU is a Tx high station, the transmit frequency is one T/R spacing higher than the receive frequency. If the ODU is a Tx low station, the transmit frequency is one T/R spacing lower than the receive frequency. l A valid T/R spacing value is determined by the ODU itself, and T/R Spacing(MHz) should be set according to the technical specifications of the ODU. l The T/R spacing of the ODU should be set to the same value at both ends of a radio link.


8.4.4.2 Querying ODU Information ODU information provides details about the ODU.

Prerequisite l Issue 02 (2011-05-20)

You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-69


8 Task Collection

l



Procedure Step 1 Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Equipment Information tab. Step 3 Click Query to obtain the information about the ODU.

----End

8.4.4.3 Setting ODU Power Attributes The ODU power attributes define the transmit power and receive power of the ODU.

Prerequisite l


l



Procedure Step 1 Select the ODU from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Power Attributes tab. Step 3 Set the parameters of ODU power attributes.

8-70


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8 Task Collection

NOTE

l Maximum Transmit Power(dBm) is set according to the network plan. This parameter cannot be set to a value that exceeds the nominal power rang of the ODU in the guaranteed capacity modulation module. l The maximum transmit power adjusted by using the ATPC function should not exceed Maximum Transmit Power(dBm). l Transmit Power(dBm) is set according to the network plan. This parameter specifies the transmit power of the ODU. This parameter cannot be set to a value that exceeds the nominal power rang of the ODU or a value that exceeds Maximum Transmit Power(dBm). l Power to Be Received(dBm) is used to set the expected receive power of the ODU and is mainly used in the antenna alignment stage. After this parameter is set, the NE automatically enables the antenna misalignment indicating function. l Power to Be Received(dBm) is set according to the network plan. When this parameter takes the default value, the antenna misalignment indicating function is disabled. l TX High Threshold(dBm) and TX Low Threshold(dBm) are valid only when the ATPC function is enabled.


8.4.4.4 Setting ODU Advanced Attributes ODU advanced attributes define the ODU transmit status.

Prerequisite l


l



Procedure Step 1 Select the ODU from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Advanced Attributes tab. Step 3 Configure the ODU parameters, such as Configure Transmission Status.

NOTE

l RF Loopback function is used for fault locating for the RF interfaces. The RF Loopback function is used for diagnosis and may affect the services that are transmitted over the interfaces. Hence, exercise caution before starting this function. l In normal cases, RF Loopback is set to Non-Loopback. l In normal cases, Configure Transmission Status is set to unmute.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8-71


8 Task Collection


8.4.4.5 Setting the ODU Transmitter State The state of an ODU transmitter can be mute or unmute. When the ODU transmitter is in the unmute state, the ODU transmits and receives microwave signals normally. When the ODU transmitter is in the mute state, the ODU transmitter does not work, but the ODU can receive microwave signals.

Prerequisite l


l

The corresponding IF boards and the ODUs connected to the IF boards must be added to the NE Panel.


Procedure Step 1 Select the ODU from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Advanced Attributes tab. Step 3 Set Configure Transmission Status for the ODU.

NOTE

l In normal cases, Configure Transmission Status is set to unmute. l If Configure Transmission Status is set to mute, the transmitter of the ODU does not work but can normally receive microwave signals. l If Configure Transmission Status is set to unmute, the ODU can normally transmit and receive microwave signals.


8.4.4.6 Querying the Historical Transmit Power and Receive Power If the radio link requires troubleshooting, query the change trend for the historical transmit power and receive power for reference.

Prerequisite

8-72

l


l

The corresponding IF boards and the ODUs connected to the IF boards must be added to the NE Panel. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8 Task Collection


Procedure Step 1 Select the ODU from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Performance Graph Analyse from the Function Tree. Step 2 Specify the start time and end time of a specific time span. NOTE

The time span starts from the last routine maintenance time to the current time.

Step 3 Set Monitoring Period and Power. Step 4 Click Draw. The historical transmit and receive power curve of the ODU in the specified time span is displayed. ----End

8.5 Configuring Ethernet Services and Features on the Packet Plane Configurations of Ethernet services and features on the packet plane include Ethernet port, protection, service, protocol, and OAM configurations. 8.5.1 Managing the LAG Link aggregation allows one or multiple links that are attached to the same equipment to be aggregated together to form a LAG. The aggregated links can be considered as a single logical link by the MAC address. In this manner, the bandwidth is increased and the availability of the links is improved. 8.5.2 Managing ERPS Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS) can be configured on the FE/GE ring or IP radio ring to protect the Ethernet service. 8.5.3 Configuring Ethernet Services This section describes how to configure E-LAN services. 8.5.4 Managing the MAC Address Table The MAC address table is the core of the E-LAN service. The OptiX RTN 950 provides various functions for managing the MAC address table. 8.5.5 Setting the Mode for Processing an Unknown Frame of the E-LAN Service An unknown frame is a unicast frame whose destination MAC address is not listed in the MAC address table or a multicast frame whose destination MAC address is not listed in the multicast group. By default, the NE broadcasts the unknown frame. By setting the mode for processing an unknown frame of the E-LAN service, you can change the processing mode so that unknown frame can be discarded. 8.5.6 Managing the QoS By managing the QoS, you can provide the services of different levels for different service types. 8.5.7 Using the IEEE 802.1ag OAM By using the 802.1ag OAM, you can maintain Ethernet services in an end-to-end manner. Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8-73


8 Task Collection

8.5.8 Using the IEEE 802.3ah OAM By using the IEEE 802.3ah OAM, you can maintain the point-to-point Ethernet links. 8.5.9 Using the RMON Remote monitoring (RMON) is mainly used to monitor the data traffic on a network segment or on the entire network. Currently, it is one of the widely used network management standards.

8.5.1 Managing the LAG Link aggregation allows one or multiple links that are attached to the same equipment to be aggregated together to form a LAG. The aggregated links can be considered as a single logical link by the MAC address. In this manner, the bandwidth is increased and the availability of the links is improved. 8.5.1.1 Creating a LAG Between two NEs, if the bandwidth and availability of the Ethernet links need to be improved, the new LAG must be created. 8.5.1.2 Setting LAG Parameters The LAG parameters for a LAG include port priorities. In a static LAG, traffic is always carried by a port with a higher priority. 8.5.1.3 Querying the Protocol Information of the LAG By performing this operation, you can learn about the running information of the LACP used for the LAG.

8.5.1.1 Creating a LAG Between two NEs, if the bandwidth and availability of the Ethernet links need to be improved, the new LAG must be created.

Prerequisite l


l

The board on which the LAG port to be created must be added to the NE Panel.


Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Link Aggregation Group Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Link Aggregation Group Management tab. Step 3 Click New. The system displays the Create Link Aggregation Group dialog box. Step 4 Set the LAG attributes in Attribute Settings.

8-74


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8 Task Collection

NOTE

l When Assign Automatically is selected, LAG No. cannot be set. l Revertive Mode can be set only when Load Sharing is set to Non-Sharing. l When Revertive Mode is set to Revertive Mode, the services are switched back to the former working channel after this channel is restored to normal. l Set Load Sharing to the same value as the peer equipment. It is recommended that you set Load Balancing to Non-Sharing at both ends if the LAGs are used for protection and set Load Balancing to Sharing at both ends if the LAGs are used for increasing bandwidths. l LAG Priority indicates the priority of a LAG. The smaller the value of LAG Priority, the higher the priority. l WTR Time(min) takes effect only when Revertive Mode is Revertive Mode.

Step 5 Set the LAG port in Port Settings. 1.

Set Master Board and Master Port.

2.

In Available Standby Ports, select Board for the slave port.

3.

In Port, select the standby port, and then click

.

TIP

Hold the Ctrl key or the Shift key on the keyboard to select multiple ports.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8-75


8 Task Collection

NOTE

l The Ethernet links in a LAG are considered as one link at the data link layer. Therefore, the Ethernet port attributes or IF_ETH port attributes of a master port are set to the same as those of a slave port. l If a port is already configured with Ethernet services, set the port to a master port when a LAG is configured. l When a LAG is configured, do not set a port that is already configured with services to a slave port.

4.

Click OK. A dialog box is displayed for confirmation. Click OK. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Close this dialog box.

Step 6 Optional: Set Switch LAG upon Air Interface SD to Enabled. NOTE

This operation is necessary during LAG configuration at air interfaces if signals on the radio link deteriorate and LAG switching occurs.

----End

8.5.1.2 Setting LAG Parameters The LAG parameters for a LAG include port priorities. In a static LAG, traffic is always carried by a port with a higher priority.

Prerequisite l


l

The board on which the LAG to be created must be added to NE Panel.



Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8 Task Collection

Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Link Aggregation Group Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Link Aggregation Parameters tab. Step 3 Set the port priority.


8.5.1.3 Querying the Protocol Information of the LAG By performing this operation, you can learn about the running information of the LACP used for the LAG.

Prerequisite l


l

The LAG must be created.


Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Link Aggregation Group Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Link Aggregation Group Management tab. Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8-77


8 Task Collection

Step 3 Click Query. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Close this dialog box. Step 4 In the Main Interface, select the LAG to be queried. Step 5 Query port status of the main and slave ports. NOTE

The system displays the information about the slave port in the lower part of the Main Interface.

Step 6 Right-click on the selected LAG and choose the LAG-specific information from the shortcut menu.

Step 7 Click Close. Step 8 Click the Link Aggregation Parameters tab. Step 9 Click Query. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Close this dialog box. Step 10 Query the port priority of the LAG. ----End

8.5.2 Managing ERPS Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS) can be configured on the FE/GE ring or IP radio ring to protect the Ethernet service. 8.5.2.1 Creating Ethernet Ring Protection Instances Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS) is configured by creating Ethernet ring protection instances. 8.5.2.2 Setting the Parameters of Ethernet Ring Protocol The parameters to be set include the hold-off time, WTR time, and guard time. 8.5.2.3 Querying the Status of the Ethernet Ring Protocol By performing this operation, you can discover the current status of Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS).

8.5.2.1 Creating Ethernet Ring Protection Instances Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS) is configured by creating Ethernet ring protection instances.

Prerequisite

8-78

l


l

The Ethernet boards, general-purpose IF boards, or general-purpose XPIC IF boards must be added to the NE Panel. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8 Task Collection


Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Protection > ERPS Management. Step 2 Click New. The Create Ethernet Ring Protection Protocol Instance dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Set the parameters for the ERPS protection instance.

NOTE

l Only one node on the ring can be set as the RPL owner for each Ethernet ring. l An RPL owner needs to balance the traffic on each link of an Ethernet ring. Therefore, it is not recommended that you select a convergence node as an RPL owner. Instead, select the NE that is farthest away from the convergence node as an RPL owner. l It is recommended that you set the east port on an RPL owner as an RPL Port. l The ID of a Control VLAN must not be the same as any VLAN ID used by Ethernet services. All ring nodes should use the same Control VLAN ID.


8.5.2.2 Setting the Parameters of Ethernet Ring Protocol The parameters to be set include the hold-off time, WTR time, and guard time.

Prerequisite l


l

The ERPS protection instance must be created.


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8-79


8 Task Collection

Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Protection > ERPS Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Optional: Double-click Control VLAN, and then modify the VLAN ID.

Step 3 Optional: Set the parameters of Ethernet ring protocol.

NOTE

Set the parameters according to the network plan. Default values are recommended.


8.5.2.3 Querying the Status of the Ethernet Ring Protocol By performing this operation, you can discover the current status of Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS).



Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Protection > ERPS Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Query. Step 3 Query the status of the Ethernet ring protocol. ----End

8.5.3 Configuring Ethernet Services This section describes how to configure E-LAN services. 8.5.3.1 Configuring IEEE 802.1d Bridge-Based E-LAN Services The E-LAN service refers to Ethernet service dynamic transmission in the multipoint-tomultipoint mode by means of MAC addresses. 8-80


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8 Task Collection

8.5.3.2 Configuring IEEE 802.1q Bridge-Based E-LAN Services An IEEE 802.1q bridge is a virtual bridge (VB), which can be divided by VLAN into several switching domains. 8.5.3.3 Changing Logical Ports Connected to a VB This section describes how to change the logical ports connected to a VB and the port attributes. 8.5.3.4 Deleting E-LAN Services When an E-LAN service is not required, you can delete this E-LAN service to release the Ethernet resources.

8.5.3.1 Configuring IEEE 802.1d Bridge-Based E-LAN Services The E-LAN service refers to Ethernet service dynamic transmission in the multipoint-tomultipoint mode by means of MAC addresses.

Prerequisite l


l

For ports carrying IEEE 802.1d bridge-based E-LAN services, Port Mode has been set to Layer 2 and Encapsulation Type has been set to Null.


Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click New. The New E-LAN Service dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Set the basic attributes of the E-LAN service according to the network plan. NOTE

Set Tag Type to Tag-Transparent.

Step 4 Configure the ports mounted to the bridge on the UNI side. 1.

Click UNI.

2.

Click Configuration. The Configure Port dialog box is displayed.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8-81


8 Task Collection

3.

Configure the ports mounted to the bridge on the UNI side. a.

Select the port to be mounted to the bridge. NOTE

Preset Encapsulation Type of the port to Null.

b.

4.

Click

to mount the port to the bridge.

Click OK.

Step 5 Optional: Configure split horizon groups. NOTE

The port members that are added to the same split horizon group cannot communicate with each other.

1.

Click the Split Horizon Group tab and click New. The New Split Horizon Group dialog box is displayed.

2.

Set port parameters for the split horizon group as planned.

3.

Click

4.

Click OK.

.


8.5.3.2 Configuring IEEE 802.1q Bridge-Based E-LAN Services An IEEE 802.1q bridge is a virtual bridge (VB), which can be divided by VLAN into several switching domains.

Prerequisite l


l

For the ports that carry the IEEE 802.1q bridge-based E-LAN services, Port Mode has been set to Layer 2 and Encapsulation Type has been set to 802.1Q.


8-82


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8 Task Collection

Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click New. The New E-LAN Service dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Set basic attributes of the E-LAN service as planned. NOTE

Set Tag Type to C-Awared.

Step 4 Configure the ports mounted to the bridge on the UNI side. 1.

Click UNI.

2.

Click Configuration. The Configure Port dialog box is displayed.

3.

Configure the ports mounted to the bridge on the UNI side. a.

Select the port to be mounted to the bridge. NOTE

Preset Encapsulation Type of the port to 802.1Q.

4.

b.

Click

to mount the port to the bridge.

c.

Set the VLAN ID of the port mounted to the bridge according to the network plan.

Click OK.

Step 5 Optional: Configure split horizon groups. NOTE

The port members that are added to the same split horizon group cannot communicate with each other.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8-83


8 Task Collection

1.

Click the Split Horizon Group tab and click New. The New Split Horizon Group dialog box is displayed.

2.

Set port parameters for the split horizon group as planned.

3.

Click

4.

Click OK.

.


8.5.3.3 Changing Logical Ports Connected to a VB This section describes how to change the logical ports connected to a VB and the port attributes.

Prerequisite l


l

The E-LAN services must be created.


Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 Add or delete logical ports connected to a VB. NOTE

l To add or delete ports connected to the VB on the UNI side, click the UNI tab. l To add or delete ports connected to the VB on the NNI side, click the NNI tab.

1.

Click Configuration. In the displayed Configure Port dialog box, select the port to be added to or deleted from the list of ports connected to the VB.

2.

Optional: Click

3.

Optional: Click

to add ports to the list of ports connected to the VB. to delete ports from the list of ports connected to the VB.

TIP

Hold the Ctrl key on the key board to select multiple ports.

4.

In Selected Port List, set the attributes of the ports connected to the VB.

5.

Click OK. A dialog box is displayed for confirmation.

6.

Click Yes. Close the displayed dialog box.

----End 8-84


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8 Task Collection

8.5.3.4 Deleting E-LAN Services When an E-LAN service is not required, you can delete this E-LAN service to release the Ethernet resources.

Prerequisite l


l

A configured E-LAN service is not required.


Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Query. Close the displayed dialog box. Step 3 Select the E-LAN service to be deleted and click Delete. A confirmation dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Click Yes. Close the displayed dialog box. Step 5 Click Query. The E-LAN service is already deleted. ----End

8.5.4 Managing the MAC Address Table The MAC address table is the core of the E-LAN service. The OptiX RTN 950 provides various functions for managing the MAC address table. 8.5.4.1 Creating a Static MAC Address Entry Through the creation of a static MAC address entry, the host with a specified MAC address is not affected by MAC address aging. In addition, the E-LAN service can be supported by the host that receives packets only. 8.5.4.2 Creating a Blacklist Entry of MAC Addresses Through the creation of a blacklist entry of MAC addresses, the host with a specified MAC address can be prohibited from using the E-LAN service. 8.5.4.3 Configuring the Aging Parameters of a MAC Address Table By default, the aging function of a MAC address table is enabled and the aging time is five minutes. By configuring the aging parameters of a MAC address table, you can modify such parameters. 8.5.4.4 Querying or Deleting a Dynamic MAC Address By querying or deleting a dynamic MAC address, you can query or delete all the MAC address entries that are learned by the E-LAN service. Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8-85


8 Task Collection

8.5.4.1 Creating a Static MAC Address Entry Through the creation of a static MAC address entry, the host with a specified MAC address is not affected by MAC address aging. In addition, the E-LAN service can be supported by the host that receives packets only.

Prerequisite l

The E-LAN service must be created.

l



Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 On the main interface, select the E-LAN service whose static MAC address entry needs to be created. Step 3 Click the Static MAC Address tab. Step 4 Click New. The New Static MAC Address dialog box is displayed. Step 5 Configure the parameters of the static MAC address entry.

Step 6 Click OK, and then close the dialog box that is displayed. ----End

8.5.4.2 Creating a Blacklist Entry of MAC Addresses Through the creation of a blacklist entry of MAC addresses, the host with a specified MAC address can be prohibited from using the E-LAN service.

Prerequisite l


l




Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8 Task Collection

Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 On the main interface, select the E-LAN service whose blacklist entry of MAC addresses needs to be created. Step 3 Click the Disabled MAC Address tab. Step 4 Click New. The Create Disabled MAC Address dialog box is displayed. Step 5 Configure the blacklist entry of MAC addresses.

Step 6 Click OK, and then close the dialog box that is displayed. ----End

8.5.4.3 Configuring the Aging Parameters of a MAC Address Table By default, the aging function of a MAC address table is enabled and the aging time is five minutes. By configuring the aging parameters of a MAC address table, you can modify such parameters.

Prerequisite l


l



Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 On the main interface, select the E-LAN service whose aging parameters of the MAC address table need to be configured. Step 3 Click the MAC Address Learning Parameters tab. Step 4 Configure the status of the aging function and set the aging time.

Step 5 Click Apply, and then close the dialog box that is displayed. ----End Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8-87


8 Task Collection

8.5.4.4 Querying or Deleting a Dynamic MAC Address By querying or deleting a dynamic MAC address, you can query or delete all the MAC address entries that are learned by the E-LAN service.

Prerequisite l


l



Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 On the main interface, select the E-LAN service whose dynamic MAC address needs to be queried or cleared. Step 3 Click the Self-Learning MAC Address tab. Step 4 Optional: Select the board whose dynamic MAC address needs to be queried and then check the dynamic MAC addresses in the MAC address table that is displayed. Step 5 Optional: Click Clear MAC Address to clear the dynamic MAC addresses. Then, click OK in the dialog box that is displayed for confirmation. ----End

8.5.5 Setting the Mode for Processing an Unknown Frame of the ELAN Service An unknown frame is a unicast frame whose destination MAC address is not listed in the MAC address table or a multicast frame whose destination MAC address is not listed in the multicast group. By default, the NE broadcasts the unknown frame. By setting the mode for processing an unknown frame of the E-LAN service, you can change the processing mode so that unknown frame can be discarded.

Prerequisite l


l



Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree. 8-88


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8 Task Collection

Step 2 On the main interface, select the E-LAN service, the mode for processing whose unknown frame needs to be set. Step 3 Click the Unknown Frame Processing tab. Step 4 Set the mode for processing an unknown frame of the E-LAN service.

Step 5 Click Apply, and then close the dialog box that is displayed. ----End

8.5.6 Managing the QoS By managing the QoS, you can provide the services of different levels for different service types. 8.5.6.1 Creating a DS Domain By creating a DS domain, you can create the mappings relationship of a new DS domain and configure the ports that use this mapping relationship. 8.5.6.2 Modifying the Mapping Relationships for the DS Domain This section describes how to modify the mapping relationships between packet priorities and PHB service classes in the ingress or egress direction of a DS domain. 8.5.6.3 Changing the Ports Applied to a DS Domain and Their Trusted Packet Types This section describes how to add or delete a port that uses the DS domain and set the packet type over the port. 8.5.6.4 Creating a Port Policy By creating a port policy, you can create a scheduling, weight, and shaping of the egress queues. 8.5.6.5 Modifying the Port Policy This section describes how to change the parameter values of a created port policy. 8.5.6.6 Creating Traffic By creating traffic, you can configure ACL, CAR and shaping for a specified traffic stream on a specified port. 8.5.6.7 Setting the Port That Uses the Port Policy This section describes how to set the port that uses the port policy. 8.5.6.8 Configuring Port Shaping This section describes how to configure traffic shaping for an egress port. 8.5.6.9 Querying the Port Policy This section describes how to query the port policy of a port. 8.5.6.10 Querying the DS Domain of a Port This topic describes how to query the mapping relationship between a port and a DS domain.

8.5.6.1 Creating a DS Domain By creating a DS domain, you can create the mappings relationship of a new DS domain and configure the ports that use this mapping relationship. Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8-89


8 Task Collection

Prerequisite l


l

The board of the Ethernet ports must be added on NE Panel.


Background Information The OptiX RTN 950 has a default DS domain, whose Mapping Relation ID is 1 and Mapping Relation Name is default map.

Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Diffserv Domain Management > Diffserv Domain Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click New. The Create DS Domain dialog box is displayed. Step 3 On the main interface, configure the DS domain attributes. NOTE

The MPLS EXP value can be modified in the default Diffserv domain (Default Map) only.

Step 4 Click the Inbound Mapping Relation tab. Step 5 Configure the mapping relationships between the priorities of ingress packets and PHB service classes. Step 6 Click the Outbound Mapping Relation tab. Step 7 Configure the mapping relationships between the priorities of egress packets and PHB service classes. Step 8 Select Board where the application ports exist from Application Port. Step 9 Select a port from Available Port, and then click

.

TIP

Hold the Ctrl key on the keyboard to select multiple ports.

8-90


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8 Task Collection

NOTE

l The PHB service class refers to the forwarding behavior of the DS node on the behavior aggregate (BA) operation. The forwarding behavior can meet the specific requirements. l The PHB service classes are BE, AF1, AF2, AF3, AF4, EF, CS6, and CS7. The priorities (C_VLAN priority, S_VLAN priority, DSCP value and MPLS EXP value) contained in the packets of the DS domain and the eight PHB service classes meet the requirements of the specified or default mapping relationship.


8.5.6.2 Modifying the Mapping Relationships for the DS Domain This section describes how to modify the mapping relationships between packet priorities and PHB service classes in the ingress or egress direction of a DS domain.


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8-91


8 Task Collection



Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Diffserv Domain Management > Diffserv Domain Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select the created DS domain and change its attributes on the main interface. NOTE

The MPLS EXP value can be modified in the default Diffserv domain (Default Map) only.

Step 3 Optional: Change the mapping relationship in the ingress direction. 1.

Click the Inbound Mapping Relation tab.

2.

Double-click the parameters whose values need to be changed and change the mapping relationship between the packet priorities and PHB classes in the ingress direction. NOTE


3.


Step 4 Optional: Change the mapping relationship in the egress direction. 1.

Click the Outbound Mapping Relation tab.

2.

Double-click the parameters whose values need to be changed and change the mapping relationship between the packet priorities and PHB classes in the egress direction. NOTE


3.



8-92


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8 Task Collection

8.5.6.3 Changing the Ports Applied to a DS Domain and Their Trusted Packet Types This section describes how to add or delete a port that uses the DS domain and set the packet type over the port.




Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Diffserv Domain Management > Diffserv Domain Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select the DS domain for which you need to add or delete an application port on the main interface. Step 3 Click the Application Object tab. Step 4 Click Modify. Step 5 Add or delete a port that uses the DS domain. Option

Description

If...

Then...

You need to add a port that uses the DS domain

1. Select the board where the application port is located from the drop-down list of Board. 2. Select the port to be added from the dropdown list of Available Port. 3. Click

.

You need to delete a port that uses the DS 1. Select the board where the application port is domain located from the drop-down list of Board. 2. Select the port to be deleted from the port list of Selected Port. 3. Click You need to change the packet type identified by the port Issue 02 (2011-05-20)

.

Select a new packet type from the drop-down list of Packet Type.


8-93


8 Task Collection TIP

Hold the Ctrl key on the key board to select multiple ports. NOTE

l C-VLAN indicates the client-side VLAN priority, and the value 7 indicates the highest priority. l S-VLAN indicates the server-side VLAN priority, and the value 7 indicates the highest priority. l The differentiated services code point (DSCP) refers to bits 0-5 of the differentiated services (DS) field in the packet and indicates the service class and discarding priority of the packet. l The packets trusted by the OptiX RTN 950 are the C_VLAN, S_VLAN, IP DSCP and MPLS packets that contain the C_VLAN priority, S_VLAN priority, DSCP value or MPLS EXP value. By default, the untrusted packets are mapped to the BE service class for best-effort forwarding.


8.5.6.4 Creating a Port Policy By creating a port policy, you can create a scheduling, weight, and shaping of the egress queues.

Prerequisite l


l

The board of the Ethernet ports must be added on NE Panel.


Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Policy Management > Port Policy from the Function Tree. Step 2 Create a port policy by adding a port policy on the NMS.

8-94

1.

Click New. The Create Port Policy dialog box is displayed.

2.

Set the ID and name of the port policy.

3.

Configure the scheduling, weight, and shaping of the egress queues.


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8 Task Collection

NOTE

l The strict priority (SP) scheduling algorithm is designed for the key services. One important characteristic of the key services is that higher priorities are required to minimize the response delay in the case of congestion events. l The weighted round robin (WRR) scheduling algorithm divides each port into multiple output subqueues. The polling scheduling is performed among the output sub-queues to ensure that each subqueue has a certain period of service time. l The OptiX RTN 950 supports the setting of the SP+WRR scheduling algorithm of the CoS queue according to the requirement, and provides one or more queues that comply with the SP algorithm. Except for the default value, however, the value of the WRR scheduling algorithm and the value of the SP scheduling algorithm cannot be interleaved. That is, except for the default value, Grooming Police After Reloading can be changed from SP to WRR according to the queue priorities in a descending order (CS7-BE). l Policy Weight(%) specifies the weight of the policy in the WRR queue. The weight indicates the percentage of the bandwidth resources obtained by the WRR queue. l Bandwidth Limit indicates or specifies whether traffic shaping is enabled for an egress queue corresponding to a PHB service class. l CIR (kbit/s), PIR (kbit/s), CBS (byte), and PBS (byte) can be set only when Bandwidth Limit is set to Enabled.

4.


Step 3 Create a port policy by duplicating an existing port policy. 1.

Select a similar port policy and click Copy. The Duplicate QoS Policy dialog box is displayed.

2.

Change the name of the port policy.

3.


4.

Select the duplicated port policy and change the scheduling, weight, and shaping of the egress queues.

5.


----End

8.5.6.5 Modifying the Port Policy This section describes how to change the parameter values of a created port policy.

Prerequisite l


l

The port policy must be created.


Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Policy Management > Port Policy from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select the port policy whose parameter values need to be changed. Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8-95


8 Task Collection

Step 3 Double-click the parameters whose values need to be changed and change the queue scheduling, weight, and queue shaping of the port queues. NOTE

l The strict priority (SP) scheduling algorithm is designed for the key services. One important characteristic of the key services is that higher priorities are required to minimize the response delay in the case of congestion events. l The weighted round robin (WRR) scheduling algorithm divides each port into multiple output sub-queues. The polling scheduling is performed among the output sub-queues to ensure that each sub-queue has a certain period of service time. l The OptiX RTN 950 supports the setting of the SP+WRR scheduling algorithm of the CoS queue according to the requirement, and provides one or more queues that comply with the SP algorithm. Except for the default value, however, the value of the WRR scheduling algorithm and the value of the SP scheduling algorithm cannot be interleaved. That is, except for the default value, Grooming Police After Reloading can be changed from SP to WRR according to the queue priorities in a descending order (CS7-BE). l Policy Weight(%) specifies the weight of the policy in the WRR queue. The weight indicates the percentage of the bandwidth resources obtained by the WRR queue. l Bandwidth Limit indicates or specifies whether traffic shaping is enabled for an egress queue corresponding to a PHB service class. l CIR (kbit/s), PIR (kbit/s), CBS (byte), and PBS (byte) can be set only when Bandwidth Limit is set to Enabled.


8.5.6.6 Creating Traffic By creating traffic, you can configure ACL, CAR and shaping for a specified traffic stream on a specified port.

Prerequisite l


l


l



Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Policy Management > Port Policy from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Traffic Classification Configuration tab. Step 3 Click New. The Create Traffic Classification dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Set the attributes. 8-96


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8 Task Collection

NOTE

Set the parameters according to the network plan.


8.5.6.7 Setting the Port That Uses the Port Policy This section describes how to set the port that uses the port policy.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8-97


8 Task Collection

Prerequisite l


l


l


Tools, Instruments, and Materials U2000

Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Policy Management > Port Policy from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Application Object tab. Step 3 Click Modify. Then, the Configure Port dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Set the port that uses the port policy. 1.

Select Board where the port that needs to use the port policy from Application Port.

2.

Select a port from Available Ports, and then click

.

TIP


3.


Step 5 Delete the port that uses the port policy. 1.

Select the port to be deleted from Selected Ports and click

.

TIP


8-98


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


2.

8 Task Collection


----End

8.5.6.8 Configuring Port Shaping This section describes how to configure traffic shaping for an egress port.

Prerequisite l


l

The Ethernet board must be created on the NE Panel.


Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Port Shaping Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click New. The New dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Set the parameters for port shaping.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8-99



Traffic shaping for an egress queue uses the single token bucket two color marker algorithm. The value of the CIR must be equal to the value of the PIR. In actual traffic shaping processing, only the PIR is valid. If the traffic shaping function is enabled, OptiX RTN 950 processes the packets in the buffer queue through the following methods when no packets are available in the queue. l When the buffer queue is empty, the packets are processed as follows: If the rate of a packet is equal to or lower than the PIR, it is directly forwarded; if the rate of a packet is higher than the PIR, it enters the buffer queue and then is forwarded at a rate equal to the PIR. l When the buffer queue is empty, certain burst packets can be forwarded if the rate of the packets is equal to or lower than the PIR in a certain period. The maximum traffic of the burst packets is determined by the PBS. l When the buffer queue is not empty, the packets whose rate passes the restriction of the PIR directly enter the buffer queue and then are forwarded at a rate equal to the PIR.


8.5.6.9 Querying the Port Policy This section describes how to query the port policy of a port.



Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Policy Management > Port Policy from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select the created port policy. Step 3 Click the CoS Configuration tab. Step 4 Click Query. Close the displayed dialog box. Step 5 Query the CoS configuration of the port policy. Step 6 Click the Traffic Classification Configuration tab. Step 7 Click Query. Close the displayed dialog box. Step 8 Query the traffic classification of the port policy. Step 9 Click the Applied Object tab. Step 10 Click Query. Close the displayed dialog box. Step 11 Query the ports that use the port policy. ----End 8-100


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8 Task Collection

8.5.6.10 Querying the DS Domain of a Port This topic describes how to query the mapping relationship between a port and a DS domain.



Background Information The OptiX RTN 950 has a default DS domain, whose Mapping Relation ID is 1 and Mapping Relation Name is default map. Before another DS domain is created, all the ports belong to this default DS domain.

Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Diffserv Domain Management > Diffserv Domain Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Inbound Mapping Relation tab. Step 3 Click Query. Close the displayed dialog box. Step 4 Query the attributes of the DS domain and the mapping relationship between the packet priority level in the ingress direction and the PHB service class. Step 5 Click the Outbound Mapping Relation tab. Step 6 Click Query. Close the displayed dialog box. Step 7 Query the attributes of the DS domain and the mapping relationship between the priority level of the packets in the egress direction and the PHB service class. Step 8 Click the Application Object tab. Step 9 Click Query. Close the displayed dialog box. Step 10 Query the ports that use the DS domain. ----End

8.5.7 Using the IEEE 802.1ag OAM By using the 802.1ag OAM, you can maintain Ethernet services in an end-to-end manner. 8.5.7.1 Creating an MD A maintenance domain (MD) defines the Ethernet OAM range and level. MDs of different ranges and levels can provide users with differentiated OAM services. 8.5.7.2 Creating an MA An MD can be divided into several independent maintenance associations (MAs). By creating MAs, you can associate specific Ethernet services with MAs. This facilitates Ethernet OAM operations. Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8-101


8 Task Collection

8.5.7.3 Creating MEPs MEPs initiate or terminate Ethernet OAM packets. After creating MEPs, you can check the Ethernet link between MEPs in the same MA by performing OAM operations. 8.5.7.4 Creating Remote MEPs in an MA To ensure that an MEP can respond to the OAM operations initiated by the other MEPs in the same MA, you need to set the other MEPs to become remote MEPs of this MEP. 8.5.7.5 Creating MIPs The maintenance association intermediate points (MIPs) can respond to specific OAM packets. By creating MIPs, you can divide the Ethernet link between the MEPs in the same MA into several segments, therefore facilitating the detection of the Ethernet link. 8.5.7.6 Performing a CC Test After the continuity check (CC) test, the unidirectional link status can be checked automatically and periodically. If the link is fault after the CC test is started at the source end, the sink equipment reports the corresponding alarm. 8.5.7.7 Performing an LB Test During a loopback (LB) test, you can check the bidirectional connectivity between the source MEP and any MEP in the same maintenance association (MA). 8.5.7.8 Performing an LT Test Based on the LB test, the link trace (LT) test further improves the capability to locate faults. That is, the faulty network segment can be located according to the MIP through only one test.

8.5.7.1 Creating an MD A maintenance domain (MD) defines the Ethernet OAM range and level. MDs of different ranges and levels can provide users with differentiated OAM services.

Prerequisite l


l

The corresponding board must be added on the NE Panel.


Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Maintenance Association tab. Step 3 Choose New > New Maintenance Domain. The system displays the New Maintenance Domain dialog box. Step 4 Set the MD parameters.

8-102


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8 Task Collection

NOTE

l Maintenance Domain Level specifies the level of the maintenance domain. l The values 0 to 7 indicates maintenance domain levels in an ascending order. l MEPs transparently transmit OAM protocol packets if the packets have a higher level than the parameter value. l MEPs discard OAM protocol packets if the packets have a lower level than the parameter value. l MEPs respond to or terminate OAM protocol packets based on the packet type if the packets have the same level as the parameter value.


8.5.7.2 Creating an MA An MD can be divided into several independent maintenance associations (MAs). By creating MAs, you can associate specific Ethernet services with MAs. This facilitates Ethernet OAM operations.

Prerequisite l


l

The MD must be created.

l

The Ethernet service must be created.


Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Maintenance Association tab. Step 3 Select the maintenance domain in which a maintenance association needs to be created. Choose New > New Maintenance Association. The system displays the New Maintenance Association dialog box. Step 4 Set the MA parameters. NOTE

Click in Relevant Service. Select the corresponding services in the displayed Select Service dialog box.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8-103


8 Task Collection


8.5.7.3 Creating MEPs MEPs initiate or terminate Ethernet OAM packets. After creating MEPs, you can check the Ethernet link between MEPs in the same MA by performing OAM operations.

Prerequisite l


l

The MA must be created.


Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Maintenance Association tab. Step 3 Select the maintenance association in which an MEP needs to be created. Choose New > New MEP Point. The system displays the New MEP Point dialog box. Step 4 Set the MEP parameters.

8-104


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8 Task Collection

NOTE

l Each MEP needs to be configured with an MP ID, which is unique in the maintenance association. The MP ID is required in the OAM operation. l Direction specifies the direction of the MEP. l Ingress indicates the direction in which the packets are transmitted to the port, and Egress indicates the direction in which the packets are transmitted from the port. l In the case of the tests based on the MP IDs, CC Status must be set to Active.


8.5.7.4 Creating Remote MEPs in an MA To ensure that an MEP can respond to the OAM operations initiated by the other MEPs in the same MA, you need to set the other MEPs to become remote MEPs of this MEP.

Prerequisite l


l



Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Maintenance Association tab. Step 3 Choose OAM > Manage Remote MEP Point. The Manage Remote MEP Point dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Click New. The Add Maintenance Association Remote Maintenance Point dialog box is displayed. Step 5 Set the parameters of the new remote MEP.

NOTE

If other MEPs will initiate OAM operations to an MEP in the same MA, set these MEPs as remote MEPs.

Step 6 Click OK. Close the displayed dialog box. ----End Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8-105


8 Task Collection

8.5.7.5 Creating MIPs The maintenance association intermediate points (MIPs) can respond to specific OAM packets. By creating MIPs, you can divide the Ethernet link between the MEPs in the same MA into several segments, therefore facilitating the detection of the Ethernet link.

Prerequisite l


l



Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the MIP Point tab. Step 3 Select the maintenance domain in which an MIP needs to be created, and then click New. The New MIP Maintenance Point dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Set the parameters of the new MIP.

NOTE

l Each MIP needs to be configured with an MP ID, which is unique in the maintenance domain. The MP ID is required in the OAM operation. l To create MEPs and MIPs in a service at a port, ensure that only one MIP can be created and the level of the MIP must be higher than the level of the MEP.


8.5.7.6 Performing a CC Test After the continuity check (CC) test, the unidirectional link status can be checked automatically and periodically. If the link is fault after the CC test is started at the source end, the sink equipment reports the corresponding alarm.

Prerequisite

8-106

l


l

The MEP must be created. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


l

8 Task Collection

The remote MEPs must be created.



Only the MEP can enable the CC test and function as the receiving and responding end in the test.

l

During the CC check, the source MEP constructs and transmits continuity check message (CCM) packets periodically. After receiving the CCM packets from the source MEP, the sink MEP directly enables the CC function for this source MEP. If the sink MEP fails to receive the CCM packets from the source MEP within the check period (that is, 3.5 times of the transmit period), it reports the alarm automatically.

l

Performing a CC test does not affect the services.

Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Maintenance Association tab. Step 3 Select the MEP where you need to perform the CC test and then choose OAM > Activate CC. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. NOTE

l Before the CC test, you can set CC Test Transmit Period according to the actual requirements. l To disable a CC test, select the MEP where the CC test is performed and then choose OAM > Deactivate. TIP

l Alternatively, you can enable a CC test by right-clicking an MEP and then choosing Activate CC from the shortcut menu. l Alternatively, you can disable a CC test by right-clicking an MEP and then choosing Deactivate CC from the shortcut menu.

Step 4 Click Close. ----End

8.5.7.7 Performing an LB Test During a loopback (LB) test, you can check the bidirectional connectivity between the source MEP and any MEP in the same maintenance association (MA).

Prerequisite l


l

The source and sink MEPs in the same maintenance domain must be created.

l


l

The CC function must be enabled.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8-107


8 Task Collection



Only MEPs can initiate the LB test and function as the receive end in the test.

l

During the LB test, the source MEP constructs and transmits the LBM frames and starts the timer. If the sink MP receives the LBM frames, it sends the LBR frames back to the source MEP. This indicates that the loopback is successful. If the source MEP timer times out, it indicates that the loopback fails.

l

Performing an LB test does not affect the services.

Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Maintenance Association tab. Step 3 Select the maintenance domain and maintenance association for the LB test. Step 4 Choose OAM > Start LB. The LB Test dialog box is displayed. TIP

To enable an LB test, you can also right-click an MEP and then choose Start LB from the shortcut menu.

Step 5 Select the method for identifying the destination MP and set the parameters involved in the LB test. NOTE

l To identify the destination MP according to the MP ID, select MP ID. Only the MEP ID can be set to the Destination Maintenance Point ID. l To identify the destination MP according to the MAC address, select Maintenance Point MAC Address. Only the MAC address of the MEP can be set to the MAC address of the Destination Maintenance Point MAC Address.

Step 6 Click Start Test. Then, the LB test result is displayed in the Detection Result window. ----End

8.5.7.8 Performing an LT Test Based on the LB test, the link trace (LT) test further improves the capability to locate faults. That is, the faulty network segment can be located according to the MIP through only one test. 8-108


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8 Task Collection

Prerequisite l


l

The source and sink MEPs in the same MD must be created.

l


l

The CC function must be enabled.



Only MEPs can initiate the LT test and work as the termination point in the test.

l

During the LT test, the source MEP constructs and transmits the LTM frames and starts the timer. All the MPs that receive the LTM frames send the LTR frame response. According to the LTR frame response, you can verify all the MIPs that pass from the source MEP to the sink MEP.

l

Performing an LT test does not affect services.

Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Maintenance Association tab. Step 3 Select the maintenance domain and maintenance association for the LT test. Step 4 Choose OAM > Start LT. The LT Test dialog box is displayed. TIP

To enable an LT test, you can also right-click an MEP and then choose Start LT from the shortcut menu.

Step 5 Select the method for identifying the destination MP and set the parameters involved in the LT test. NOTE

l To identify the destination MP according to the MP ID, select MP ID. Only the MEP ID can be set to the Destination Maintenance Point ID. l To identify the destination MP according to the MAC address, select Maintenance Point MAC Address. Only the MAC address of the MEP can be set to the MAC address of the Destination Maintenance Point MAC Address.

Step 6 Click Start Test. Then, the LT test result is displayed in the Detection Result window. ----End Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8-109


8 Task Collection

8.5.8 Using the IEEE 802.3ah OAM By using the IEEE 802.3ah OAM, you can maintain the point-to-point Ethernet links. 8.5.8.1 Enabling the OAM Auto-Discovery Function The IEEE 802.3ah OAM is realized based on the OAM auto-discovery. After the OAM autodiscovery succeeds, the equipment automatically monitors the fault and performance of the link. 8.5.8.2 Enabling the Link Event Notification After the link event notification is enabled on the local equipment, the opposite equipment is informed if the OAM detects a link fault or an link performance event. 8.5.8.3 Modifying the OAM Error Frame Monitoring Threshold The threshold for the OAM error frame monitoring is a standard for the OAM to detect the link performance. Generally, the default value is used. You can modify the value according to the situation of the link. 8.5.8.4 Performing Remote Loopbacks After the Ethernet port on the local equipment sends data to the port on the interconnected equipment, the local end can request the opposite end to return the data. 8.5.8.5 Enabling Self-Loop Detection After enabling the self-loop detection on an Ethernet port, you can check the loopback of the port and the loopback between the port and other Ethernet ports on the board.

8.5.8.1 Enabling the OAM Auto-Discovery Function The IEEE 802.3ah OAM is realized based on the OAM auto-discovery. After the OAM autodiscovery succeeds, the equipment automatically monitors the fault and performance of the link.



Background Information The OAM auto-discovery is realized based on the auto-negotiation between the local equipment and the opposite equipment. If the negotiation fails, the local equipment reports an alarm. After OAM auto-discovery is successfully completed, the link performance is monitored according to the error frame threshold. You can set the error frame threshold on the NMS.

Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Port OAM Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the OAM Parameter tab. Step 3 Select the port, and set OAM Working Mode. 8-110


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8 Task Collection

NOTE

l The OAM mode includes the active mode and the passive mode. For two interconnected systems, the OAM mode of either or both systems must be the active mode. Otherwise, the OAM auto-discovery fails. l If both ends of a link are in passive OAM mode, a link fault occurs, or either end of a link does not receive OAM protocol packets within 5 seconds, an alarm is reported, indicating that OAM autodiscovery fails.

Step 4 Set Enable OAM Protocol to Enabled.

Step 5 Click Apply. Close the displayed dialog box. Step 6 Click the Remote OAM Parameter tab. Click Query to obtain the OAM capability of the opposite end. Close the displayed dialog box. ----End

8.5.8.2 Enabling the Link Event Notification After the link event notification is enabled on the local equipment, the opposite equipment is informed if the OAM detects a link fault or an link performance event.

Prerequisite l


l

The OAM auto-discovery operation must successful on the equipment at both ends.


Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Port OAM Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the OAM Parameter tab. Step 3 Select the corresponding port and set Link Event Notification to Enabled.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8-111


8 Task Collection


8.5.8.3 Modifying the OAM Error Frame Monitoring Threshold The threshold for the OAM error frame monitoring is a standard for the OAM to detect the link performance. Generally, the default value is used. You can modify the value according to the situation of the link.

Prerequisite l


l

The IEEE 802.3ah OAM function must be enabled on the remote equipment and the OAM auto-discovery operation must be successful on the equipment at both ends.


Background Information After the OAM auto-discovery operation is successful, the remote link event notification function is enabled and the monitoring time and errored frame threshold are set at the local end. If the local equipment detects a link event in the receive direction, it informs the opposite equipment of the link event. If the remote alarm for the link event is also supported at the opposite end, the opposite equipment can also inform the local equipment of the link event that is detected at the opposite end. Then, the corresponding alarm is reported at the local end.

Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Port OAM Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the OAM Error Frame Monitor tab. Step 3 Select the port and set the parameters in the OAM Error Frame Monitor tab page.

NOTE

An alarm is reported if the number of errored frame events within Monitor Window or Period Window exceeds the specified monitoring threshold.

Step 4 Click Apply. Close the displayed dialog box. ----End 8-112


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8 Task Collection

8.5.8.4 Performing Remote Loopbacks After the Ethernet port on the local equipment sends data to the port on the interconnected equipment, the local end can request the opposite end to return the data.

Prerequisite l


l

The OAM auto-discovery operation must be successful at both ends of the link.

l

On the equipment that initiates the loopback, OAM Working Mode must be set to Active.

l

The equipment that responds to the loopback must support the remote loopback.



If a port is capable of responding to loopbacks, it enters the loopback responding state and reports the loopback responding alarm after receiving the command of enabling the remote loopback function sent from the opposite OAM port. In this case, the equipment that initiates the loopback enters the loopback initiation state and reports the loopback initiation alarm.

l

Generally, after the remote loopback function is enabled, service packets, except the OAMPDU, are looped back at the remote end.

l

After using the remote loopback function to complete the fault locating and the link performance detection, you need to disable the remote loopback function at the end where the loopback is initiated and then restore the services. The alarm is automatically cleared.

Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Port OAM Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the OAM Parameter tab. Step 3 Select the port and set Remote Side Loopback Response to Enabled.

Step 4 Click Apply. Close the displayed dialog box. Step 5 Choose Enable Remote Loopback from the drop-down menu of OAM. Close the displayed dialog box.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8-113



To release remote loopbacks, select Disable Remote Loopback.

----End

8.5.8.5 Enabling Self-Loop Detection After enabling the self-loop detection on an Ethernet port, you can check the loopback of the port and the loopback between the port and other Ethernet ports on the board.

Prerequisite l


l

The required board is already added on the NE Panel.

l

All the external physical ports on the Ethernet service processing board must be enabled.


Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Advanced Attributes tab. Step 3 Set Loopback Check to Enabled. Step 4 Click Apply. Close the displayed dialog box. ----End

8.5.9 Using the RMON Remote monitoring (RMON) is mainly used to monitor the data traffic on a network segment or on the entire network. Currently, it is one of the widely used network management standards. 8.5.9.1 Browsing the Performance Data in the Statistics Group of an Ethernet Port After you configure an RMON statistics group for an Ethernet port, you can browse the realtime statistical performance data of the port. 8.5.9.2 Configuring an Alarm Group for an Ethernet Port After you configure an RMON alarm group for an Ethernet port, you can monitor whether the performance value of the port crosses the configured thresholds in the long term. 8.5.9.3 Configuring a Historical Control Group When configuring a historical control group for an Ethernet port, you can configure how the historical performance data of the port is monitored. The Ethernet board monitors the historical performance data of each port at the default sampling interval of 30 minutes. A maximum of 50 historical performance entries can be saved. 8.5.9.4 Browsing the Performance Data in the Historical Group of an Ethernet Port After you configure an RMON historical group for an Ethernet port, you can browse the historical performance data of the port. 8-114


Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8 Task Collection

8.5.9.1 Browsing the Performance Data in the Statistics Group of an Ethernet Port After you configure an RMON statistics group for an Ethernet port, you can browse the realtime statistical performance data of the port.

Prerequisite l


l

The corresponding board must be added in the NE Panel.


Procedure Step 1 Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Statistics Group tab. Step 3 Set the required parameters for the statistics group. 1.

Select the performance items for which statistics need to be collected.

2.

Set Sampling Interval. Sampling Interval represents the time unit of the performance statistics.

Step 4 Click Resetting begins. NOTE

If you click Start, the register of the statistics group is not reset to clear the existing data.

----End

8.5.9.2 Configuring an Alarm Group for an Ethernet Port After you configure an RMON alarm group for an Ethernet port, you can monitor whether the performance value of the port crosses the configured thresholds in the long term.

Prerequisite l


l

The corresponding boards must be added in the NE Panel.


Procedure Step 1 Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the RMON Setting tab. Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8-115


8 Task Collection

Step 3 Click the Object tab and set the corresponding parameters. Step 4 Click the Event tab and set the corresponding parameters. Step 5 Click Apply. Close the displayed dialog box. ----End

8.5.9.3 Configuring a Historical Control Group When configuring a historical control group for an Ethernet port, you can configure how the historical performance data of the port is monitored. The Ethernet board monitors the historical performance data of each port at the default sampling interval of 30 minutes. A maximum of 50 historical performance entries can be saved.

Prerequisite l


l



Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON History Control Group. Step 2 Set the parameters of the historical control group. NOTE

l Sampling Interval(s) represents the time span of the RMON performance item whose statistics are collected. For Custom Period1, Sampling Interval(s) can range from 300s to 43200s. For Custom Period2, Sampling Interval(s) can range from 300s to 86400s. The step for Sampling Interval(s) is 30s. l Number of Items represents the number of RMON performance items whose statistics can be collected at the same time. The maximum value for this parameter is 50.


8.5.9.4 Browsing the Performance Data in the Historical Group of an Ethernet Port After you configure an RMON historical group for an Ethernet port, you can browse the historical performance data of the port.

Prerequisite

8-116

l


l


l

The objects and performance events to be monitored must be set. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8 Task Collection


Procedure Step 1 Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the History Group tab. Step 3 Set the parameters of the historical group. 1.

Select the target port from Object.

2.

Click and specify the required time span.

3.

Select the performance items to browse.

4.

Under History Table Type, set the time span for the performance items to be browsed.

Step 4 Click Query. ----End

8.6 Managing the Clock To ensure the clock synchronization between transmission nodes on a transport network, you need to manage the NE clock. 8.6.1 Configuring the Clock Sources This topic describes how to configure the clock source according to the planned clock synchronization scheme to ensure that all the NEs on the network trace the same clock. 8.6.2 Configuring Clock Subnets For simple networks, such as chain networks, configure the clock source protection or only configure the clock priority to implement the clock source protection. For complex networks, such as ring networks or intersecting and tangent rings that are derived from ring networks, configure clock subnets and enable the standard SSM protocol or extended SSM protocol to implement the clock source protection. 8.6.3 User-Defined Clock Quality By default, the NE considers the clock quality extracted from the clock source as the clock quality. If the clock quality is zero (the synchronization quality is unknown), the clock is considered as unavailable clock. In the case of any special requirements, the user can define the clock quality for which the source clock quality and clock quality are zero. 8.6.4 Configuring the SSM Output Status After the standard SSM protocol or extended synchronization status message (SSM) protocol is enabled, the NE transmits the SSM to other NEs through the radio link or optical line by default. To prevent two clock subnets from affecting each other, the NE needs to forbid the SSM bytes from being transmitted on the link that is connected to other clock subnets. 8.6.5 Configuring the Clock ID Output Status After the extended synchronization status message (SSM) protocol is enabled, the NE transmits the clock ID to other NEs through the radio link or optical line by default. To prevent two clock subnets from affecting each other, the NE needs to forbid the clock ID from being transmitted on the link that is connected to other clock subnets. Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8-117


8 Task Collection

8.6.6 Modifying the Recovery Parameter of the Clock Source In the case of the special requirements, you can modify the recovery parameter of the clock source. 8.6.7 Querying the Clock Synchronization Status You can know the current clock synchronization status of an NE by querying the clock synchronization status.

8.6.1 Configuring the Clock Sources This topic describes how to configure the clock source according to the planned clock synchronization scheme to ensure that all the NEs on the network trace the same clock.



Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Physical Clock > Clock Source Priority. Step 2 Click the System Clock Source Priority List tab. Step 3 Click Create. The Add Clock Source dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Select the clock sources. TIP

Hold the Ctrl key on the keyboard to select multiple clock sources.

Step 5 Click OK. Step 6 Optional: Repeat Step 3 to Step 5 to add other clock sources. Step 7 Optional: Select a clock source and click clock source. 8-118

or


to adjust the priority of this

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8 Task Collection

NOTE

The clock priorities levels are arranged in a descending order from the first row to the last row. The internal clock source is always of the lowest priority.


8.6.2 Configuring Clock Subnets For simple networks, such as chain networks, configure the clock source protection or only configure the clock priority to implement the clock source protection. For complex networks, such as ring networks or intersecting and tangent rings that are derived from ring networks, configure clock subnets and enable the standard SSM protocol or extended SSM protocol to implement the clock source protection.

Prerequisite l


l

The priority list of the clock source must be configured.


Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Physical Clock > Clock Subnet Configuration. Step 2 Click the Clock Subnet tab. Step 3 Start the clock protection protocol and configure its parameters.


8.6.3 User-Defined Clock Quality By default, the NE considers the clock quality extracted from the clock source as the clock quality. If the clock quality is zero (the synchronization quality is unknown), the clock is considered as unavailable clock. In the case of any special requirements, the user can define the clock quality for which the source clock quality and clock quality are zero. Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8-119


8 Task Collection

Prerequisite l


l

The priority level of a clock source must be set.


Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Physical Clock > Clock Subnet Configuration. Step 2 Click the Clock Quality tab. Step 3 Click the Clock Source Quality tab. Step 4 Set the user-defined clock quality.

NOTE

Generally, it is recommended that you use the default value.

Step 5 Click Apply. Step 6 Click the Manual Setting of 0 Quality Level tab. Step 7 Set the clock quality for which the quality level is zero.

NOTE

Generally, it is recommended that you use the default value.


8.6.4 Configuring the SSM Output Status After the standard SSM protocol or extended synchronization status message (SSM) protocol is enabled, the NE transmits the SSM to other NEs through the radio link or optical line by default. To prevent two clock subnets from affecting each other, the NE needs to forbid the SSM bytes from being transmitted on the link that is connected to other clock subnets.

Prerequisite

8-120

l


l


l

The standard SSM or extended SSM protocol is enabled. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8 Task Collection


Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Physical Clock > Clock Subnet Configuration. Step 2 Click the SSM Output tab. Step 3 Set the SSM control status.

NOTE

l Control Status is valid only when the SSM protocol or the extended SSM protocol is started. l Control Status indicates whether the SSM is output at the line port. l When the line port is connected to an NE in the same clock subnet, set Control Status to Enabled. Otherwise, set this parameter to Disabled.


8.6.5 Configuring the Clock ID Output Status After the extended synchronization status message (SSM) protocol is enabled, the NE transmits the clock ID to other NEs through the radio link or optical line by default. To prevent two clock subnets from affecting each other, the NE needs to forbid the clock ID from being transmitted on the link that is connected to other clock subnets.

Prerequisite l


l


l

The extended SSM protocol must be enabled.


Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Physical Clock > Clock Subnet Configuration. Step 2 Click the Clock ID Output tab. Step 3 Set the clock ID control status.

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8-121



l Output Clock ID is valid only when the extended SSM protocol is started. l Output Clock ID indicates whether the clock source ID is output at the line port. l If the line ports are connected to the NEs in the same clock subnet and if the extended SSM protocol is started on the opposite NE, Output Clock ID is set to Enabled. Otherwise, this parameter is set to Disabled.


8.6.6 Modifying the Recovery Parameter of the Clock Source In the case of the special requirements, you can modify the recovery parameter of the clock source.



Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Physical Clock > Clock Source Switching. Step 2 Click the Clock Source Reversion tab. Step 3 Set the recovery parameter of the clock source.


8.6.7 Querying the Clock Synchronization Status You can know the current clock synchronization status of an NE by querying the clock synchronization status.




Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8 Task Collection

Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Physical Clock > Clock Synchronization Status. Step 2 Click Query. Step 3 Query the clock synchronization status. ----End

Issue 02 (2011-05-20)


8-123

Huawei OptiX RTN 950 Commissioning and Configuration Guide(V100R003)

Recommend Documents